JP7188703B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "slot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art In a game machine, movable accessories that act to produce a game are provided on a game board or a frame (outer frame). In recent years, with the sophistication and complexity of game production, the number of installed accessories has increased and the size of the accessories has increased. In addition, the movable range of the character is widened, and the movement speed is increased. Furthermore, the movement of the character is becoming more complicated, and there are cases where the range of movement of a plurality of characters overlaps.

In addition, when a plurality of accessories operate at the same time, the operating current of the accessories exceeds the current that can be supplied from the power supply unit of the game machine, and the game machine may be initialized due to a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit. be. For this reason, by staggering the timings at which the role objects operate and operating the role objects one by one at the same time, the total current consumption during the operation of the role objects is suppressed. In particular, when initializing the game machine, if a plurality of accessories simultaneously return to their initial positions, the current may exceed the current that can be supplied from the power supply unit. For this reason, for example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature 1, the return action of the character is performed sequentially to prevent the total value of the current used during the return action from exceeding the limit value.

Japanese Patent No. 5485848

However, there is a concern that the above-described conventional game machines may lose interest in games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

Means 1: A gaming machine in which a game progresses based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition,
a production moving body;
a moving body supporting portion that supports the effect moving body so as to be movable between a first position and a second position;
a biasing member that biases the effect moving body toward the first position,
A force that causes the effect moving body to stay in place when the effect moving object is in a stationary state, and a force that causes the effect moving object to start moving when a force exceeding this force is applied to the effect moving object. is "A", the force exerted by the biasing member toward the first position is "B", and the direction component of the force due to the weight of the effect moving body that opposes "B" is "C", while the "B" tends to increase as the effect moving body moves away from the first position and approaches the second position,
The production moving body is
When the gaming machine is placed in the hall, "A>|B−C|" regardless of the movable range between the first position and the second position. A relationship is established and it is possible to stay on the spot,
The effect moving body is movable by the driving force of a motor, and the driving force of the motor is transmitted to the effect moving body through a gear so that the driving force is increased and transmitted to the effect moving body. is,
The gear ratio is set so that the driving force 'D' generated by the motor is equal to or greater than the force 'A' at which the effect moving body starts to move, and is transmitted to the effect moving body. has been
The urging member is made invisible to the player when the effect moving body is positioned at the first position where a force exceeding "A" is not applied to the effect moving body. do.

According to the present invention, a decline in amusement in a game can be suppressed .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of a portion of an outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame, omitting a left frame member, as viewed from below, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. . (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is a front perspective view of the effect operation unit of the plate unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the effect operation unit. It is the perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the bottom. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the mounting base unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit exploded and viewed from below; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from above; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit when it is exploded and viewed from below; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the button unit and looked from the bottom. It is a top view of a plate unit. FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the production operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. 39; 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the production operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. 39; FIG. (a) is a front view of the door lower right direction unit of the plate unit, and (b) is a right side view of the door lower right direction unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the door lower right effect unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door lower right effect unit. It is a DD sectional view in the door lower right direction production unit of FIG.42(b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door lower right production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door lower right production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right direction production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rotary body internal unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward. (a) is a front perspective view of the upper tray ball extractor unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper dish ball extractor unit attached to the dish unit base. Figure 2 is a viewed perspective view; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper bowl ball extraction unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper bowl ball extraction unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of a lower tray ball removing unit of the tray unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower tray ball removing unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame, and (b) is a back perspective view of the foul cover unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the lid member removed. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the paying-out unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the paying-out unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the sphere guidance unit; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing device. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the payment|withdrawal apparatus, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the payment|withdrawal apparatus, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the ball removing movable piece closes the ball removing passage in the dispensing device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the ball removing movable piece opens the ball removing passage. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the paying-out blade|wing in a paying-out apparatus. (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the upper full ball path unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a front perspective view of a lower full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball path unit. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the lower full-tank ball path|route unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the lower full-tank ball path|route unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower full-tank ball route unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is open. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit. It is a right perspective view of a game board. It is a left perspective view of a game board. It is a rear view (perspective view) of the game board. 1A and 1B are a front view and a sectional view of a game board; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game panel. Panel board front view, sectional view, back view FIG. 4A is a front view, a cross-sectional view, and a rear view of the center accessory; They are a game panel front view, an enlarged view near a guidance exit, and sectional drawing near a guidance exit. It is a front view of a back unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the backing unit; FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of a warp passage; It is an exploded perspective view of a front side accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back side accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back side accessory unit. It is a front view and a rear view. Perspective view of back box + right channel Transmission diagram of the right channel 4 is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit; FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view and a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal driving unit in a state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moved; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal driving unit in a state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moved; FIG. 4A is a front view and a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal drive unit after the upper liquid crystal display device is moved; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit after the upper liquid crystal display device is moved; FIG. 4A is a front view and a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal holding member in a state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moved; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal holding member in a state where the upper liquid crystal display device is not moved; FIG. 4A is a front view and a cross-sectional view of the liquid crystal holding member after the upper liquid crystal display device is moved; FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal holding member after the upper liquid crystal display device is moved; It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation production|presentation of a liquid-crystal decoration member. It is a figure which shows the front view and rear view of a body drive part. It is a figure which shows the perspective view of a fuselage|body drive part. FIG. 10 is a front view of the back unit in a state where the body drive section is visible; It is a figure explaining the hidden plate attached to the back of the body drive part. It is a figure explaining the initial state of the movable decoration part of a trunk|drum drive part. It is a figure explaining the state which the movable decoration part of the trunk|drum drive part advanced. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the movable decorative portion of the body driving portion is separated; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a state in which the movable decorative portion of the body driving portion is deformed (combined); It is the front view and the perspective view of the game board before the production start. It is a front view and a perspective view of the game board with the liquid crystal opened. FIG. 122 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body driving portion in the state of FIG. 121; FIG. 10 is a front view and a perspective view of the game board with the body moved forward; 124 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body driving portion in the state of FIG. 123; FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view and a perspective view of the game board with body parts separated; 126 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body driving portion in the state of FIG. 125; FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view and a perspective view of the game board with the body completed. 128 is a plan view, a perspective view, a front view, and a side view of the body driving portion in the state of FIG. 127; FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view and a perspective view of the game board in a state in which the combination is completed; It is a figure which shows an example of a main control board block diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of a peripheral control board block diagram. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of main control side power-on processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a special symbol/special electric accessary product control process. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of special design variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of processing at power-on of a peripheral control unit; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the concept of a group of characters. It is a figure which shows the example of a role product group initialization operation|movement management table. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of character product group initialization operation command processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of character product group initialization operation main processing (single initialization operation processing). 10 is a flow chart showing an example of character product group initialization operation main processing (single initialization operation processing). 10 is a flow chart showing an example of character product group initialization operation start determination processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of character product group initialization operation start determination processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a character product group initialization operation end determination process; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of motor initialization processing when RAM is cleared and when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of motor initialization operation start processing when RAM is cleared and when power is turned on; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of character product group initialization operation main processing (simultaneous initialization operation processing). 10 is a flow chart showing an example of character product group initialization operation main processing (simultaneous initialization operation processing). It is a flowchart which shows an example of a role product group simultaneous initialization action determination execution process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous operation possibility determination data for each character product group; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of motor pattern data update processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of motor output data generation processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the data for a motor drive. It is a timing chart at the time of execution of role product initialization processing (single initialization operation processing). FIG. 11 is another timing chart when the accessory initialization process is executed; It is a timing chart at the time of execution of the accessory initialization process (simultaneous initialization operation process).

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a door frame base unit 100 attached to the front lower part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side portion attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper dish 201 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200. A handle unit 500 that a player can operate to hit the ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a plate unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives the game ball that fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower tray 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out game balls to the player side. A letter-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball guided by the ball guiding unit 820 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side is instructed from the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 130) housed in the payout control board box 950. a payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on the base 801 and guides downward the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 which is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. An upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either a normal outlet or a full ball outlet according to the above, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 From the normal outlet of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path guides the discharged game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge opening forward and guides the game balls forward and guides them from the front end of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball routing unit 860 having a full guideway leading to full ball receptacle 528 .

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a bass speaker installed therein. 921, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside the box. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is attached across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls shot from the ball launching device 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A panel decoration 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides to, a flat plate-like game panel 2000 attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and the back of the game panel 2000 It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 4100 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. a main control unit 1300, and a front unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning holes attached in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 2000 and capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 5a. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 2000 on the upper side of the board holder 1200 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 201, the ball shooting device 680 plays a game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. . Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 15(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a). is. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left from the center of the left and right; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11. As shown in FIG. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging cutout portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the lateral outer side surfaces. It has concave portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled with the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18, etc.).

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 15(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a left side of the horizontal portion 71 which rises upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and vertically penetrating the horizontal portion 71 and having a size large enough for only one game ball to pass through. and a narrow discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notch portions 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . In addition, the front lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the projecting portions 32 and 42 . Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 and the projecting portions 32, 42 and screwed from the outer side surface. is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 by

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 in front of the projecting portions 32 and 42 . Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20. .

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the locking member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. will be described with reference to FIG. 16(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a main-body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 17A and 17B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of locking member 66 . In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained with reference to FIG. 18(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 1, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the body frame is opened together with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a).

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 is provided with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward, as shown in FIG. When the game ball falls on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state where the Therefore, there is a risk of being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 . On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass. , and the left ejection hole 52, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25. FIG. FIG. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the door frame. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a tray unit 200 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top portion attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a front right portion of the door frame base unit 100. and a handle unit 500 attached through the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 for closing the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. and the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side in the front view, protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit mounting member 160 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 560. there is

The plate units 200 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, are arranged in a row vertically and protrude forward to include an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing game balls. and a plate-like dish unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and capable of displaying images, A production operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper plate production button 257 that can be operated by the player, a plate unit cover 260 covering the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a plate unit cover 260 on the right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. A door lower right performance unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A arranged and rotated according to a game state, a transparent performance unit cover 300 covering the door lower right performance unit 270 from the front side, and an upper tray. An upper tray ball extracting unit 310 for extracting game balls stored in the lower tray 201 to the lower tray 202, a lower tray ball extracting unit 320 for extracting the game balls stored in the lower tray 202 downward, and a game hall. A ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (illustration is omitted. Also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and a plate unit base 210. A top plate decoration member 340 capable of cage light emission decoration is mainly provided.

The top unit 350 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. A translucent top decorative member 370 that is attached in the center of the left and right on the front surface of 360 and bulges forward and has a translucency, and a top speaker ( (not shown), and a door-frame decoration substrate 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface thereof.

The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown), and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front. A left decorative substrate 440 is provided.

The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown), and a plurality of LEDs mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decorative member 470 on the front. is attached to the door frame right decorative substrate (not shown);

24 and 25, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by the player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. and have. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 includes a handle operation sensor 507 (see FIG. 142) that is attached inside the handle body 502 and detects the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and a handle sensor 507 that is attached to the handle body 502. It has a stop button that can be operated by the cage player, and a contact detection sensor 509 (see FIG. 142) that is mounted inside the handle body 502 and detects contact between the player and the handle lever 504 .

As shown in FIGS. 24, 25, 54 to 56, etc., the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has a shallow box-like unit body with an open front side. 522 and a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522 . The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and the through ball passage that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full tank ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 210a of the tray unit 200. 526, a full ball receptacle 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through ball passage 526 in front view and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; The right side of the ball socket 528 is open upward in front view, and a foul ball receives a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 5a despite being shot by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. A ball receiving port 530 and a lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 200 are opened forward at the lower right corner in a front view and discharge game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530. and a ball outlet 532 in communication with 210c.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the ball feeder unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to a box-shaped unit body 542 extending left and right and having an open rear side, and the rear side of the unit body 542. A unit cover 544 which has a box shape with an open front side and is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 520 in front view, and an upper plate of the plate unit 200 which opens forward. A ball entry port 546 into which game balls stored in the 201 enter, a ball discharge port 548 which is capable of releasing the game balls entering the ball entry port 546 and which opens toward the rear, and a ball entry port. A ball discharge port 550 is provided below the ball entrance 546 and opens forward to discharge the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546.例文帳に追加Although not shown, the ball feeding unit 540 includes a ball feeding solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142) for discharging the game balls entering from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge opening 548, and a ball entrance solenoid 551 (see FIG. 142). A switching mechanism for switching the game ball entering from the port 546 to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side is provided.

The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. and a pair of glass plates 564 closing the inside of the cage unit frame 562 .

[3-1. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 26 to 41. FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the tray unit. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 30(a) is a front perspective view of the effect operation unit of the plate unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from below. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the installation base unit of the production operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the installation base unit, viewed from below.

Also, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit, viewed from below. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit, viewed from below. 39 is a plan view of the plate unit, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the production operation unit in the BB section in FIG. 39, and FIG. 41 is a production operation in the CC section in FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the unit;

Further, FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the door lower right effect unit of the dish unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 43(a) is the door lower right effect unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production|presentation unit from the back. FIG. 44 is a DD sectional view of the door lower right effect unit of FIG. 42(b). FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body internal unit. FIG. 49(a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 49(b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward.

FIG. 50(a) is a front perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 50(b) is the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray ball extractor unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray ball extractor unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 53(a) is a front perspective view of the lower tray ball extractor unit of the tray unit, and FIG. 53(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray ball extractor unit.

The plate unit 200 protrudes forward from the door frame base unit 100 . The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 for storing game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and hit into the game area 5a, and a game ball which is arranged below the upper tray 201 and supplied from the upper tray 201. and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. The plate unit 200 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an upper plate 201 which is attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 210 and has a left side bulging forward from the left and right center. and a lower plate body 214 attached to the lower front portion of the plate unit base 210 at the center in the left-right direction and protruding forward to form the lower plate 202. .

In addition, the plate unit 200 covers the front side of the upper plate main body 212 and the front side of the plate unit base 210, the upper plate main body 212, the lower plate main body 214, and the front and lower sides of the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right presentation unit 270 arranged on the right side of the presentation operation unit 220 and attached to the front right part of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right presentation unit. A performance unit cover 300 attached to the front surface of a plate unit base 210 covering the front side of 270, and game balls attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212. and a lower tray ball extracting unit 310 attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 for ejecting downward the game balls stored in the lower tray 202. 320 and .

Furthermore, the plate unit 200 includes a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine which is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 and which is arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a plate. An upper dish top decorative member 340 attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and capable of light emitting decoration, and an upper dish top decorative member 340 attached to the front left side of the dish unit base 210 on the rear side of the dish unit cover 260 and capable of emitting light forward. A plate unit left decorative board 345 having a plurality of LEDs is attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and below the door lower right effect unit 270. A plate unit right decorative substrate 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light, a top plate front decoration substrate 233 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 210 and described later, a top plate rear decoration substrate 235, and a top plate. Liquid crystal substrate 241, vibration device 242, touch panel 246, production button decoration substrate 251, production button press sensor 258, door lower right relay substrate 281, plate unit left decoration substrate 345, and plate unit right decoration substrate 346 and game board 5 A plate unit relay board 347 for relaying connection with a peripheral control board 4140 (not shown) is provided.

[3-1a. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The plate unit base 210 has an upper plate ball supply port 210a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and a plate unit base 210 which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 210a. A speaker slit 210b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending upward and downward, a lower dish ball supply port 210c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at the lower part of the left-right center when viewed from the front, and a lower dish. An upper plate ball feed port 210d is provided which penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper right side of the ball feed port 210c and extends vertically, the upper portion of which is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212. - 特許庁

Further, the plate unit base 210 includes a through hole 210e having a rectangular inner circumference and penetrating forward and backward on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 210d in a front view, and a plate-shaped receiver projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e. The piece 210f, an escape port 210g that penetrates front and back at the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d in front view, and a front and rear lower right corner that penetrates and the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. a cylinder insertion opening 210i passing through in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted; and a notch portion 210j that is cut forward from the rear end of the side surface of the .

[3-1b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate body 212 of the plate unit 200 is shaped like a container that is open upward and rearward, with the left side bulging forward from the left-right center in a front view. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guiding passage portion 212a which is opened only to the left and rear on the right end side in a front view and through which game balls can flow. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowered. More specifically, when the upper tray main body 212 is attached to the tray unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 moves from the lower position of the upper tray ball feed port 210a to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port 210d. It is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the . As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper tray main body 212, and the received game balls are transported from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the outlet 210d.

The upper plate main body 212 also has a metal ground fitting 212b extending from the center of the right and left sides to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and when the game ball comes into contact with the ground metal fitting 212b, static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

[3-1c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 is trapezoidal in plan view with a longer rear end than the front end, and is formed into a container shape that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 214 has a ball removal hole 214a that penetrates vertically through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower tray ball removal unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball removal hole 214a. is doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and also allows game balls to flow downward from the tray unit 200 through the ball extraction holes 214a. can be discharged.

[3-1d. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
30 to 32, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate body 212 at the left and right center in the front view, and to the mounting base unit 220A. a button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B in front view; and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. , a unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in front view.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit, thereby reducing the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220A and the plate unit base 210 side. It is possible to reduce the transmission of the vibration caused by the vibrating device 242 to the attachment base unit 220A and the plate unit base 210 side.

[3-1d-1. Mounting base unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the mounting base unit 220A of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and open at the top, and a A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 whose rear end is attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper side is open so that the touch unit 200B can be accommodated from the upper side; A front lens member 232, an upper plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover covering the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232. 224 and a translucent top plate front decoration member 234 attached to the plate 224 .

In addition, the mounting base unit 220A includes a top plate rear decoration substrate 235 which is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231 and has a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward, and an upper side of the top plate rear decoration substrate 235. and a translucent plate rear decorative member 236 attached to the unit cover 224, and a plate rear decorative substrate 235 sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the plate rear decorative member 236. a linear light-emitting lens member 237 whose upper end can emit light linearly by guiding the light of the above; a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted on the unit cover 224 on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 when viewed from the front; and a button mounting member. 238 and an upper tray ball extracting button 239 which is slidably mounted up and down.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a which is inclined forward from approximately the center of the front and rear so that it becomes lower as it goes forward, and two parts which penetrate the mounting side receiving portion 230a and are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. It has two through holes 230b and a cylindrical receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through hole 230b. The through-hole 230b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape that narrows downward (see FIG. 41). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. It extends at an angle so as to go forward as it goes to. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined with respect to the perpendicular to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a so that the lower ends (tips) thereof slightly approach each other.

The unit case 231 has a housing recess 231a which is open upward and can house the touch unit 220B. a pair of front support pins 231c projecting upward in a columnar shape apart from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a; It has a center support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e spaced apart from each other to the left and right, projecting in the shape of a pyramid that narrows downward from the bottom of the housing recess 231a. .

In addition, the unit case 231 is arranged around an insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending laterally and recessed downward from the upper end of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a are arranged. and a notch 231h.

The housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in plan view that is a combination of a rectangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from both left and right sides of the rectangle. In addition, the housing recess 231a is formed so that the bottom surface of the rectangular portion is lower than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222. As shown in FIG.

The four lateral support pins 231b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231a and are formed to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. As shown in FIG. Further, the lateral support pin 231b has, on its upper end side, a truncated conical tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side (see FIG. 40). The horizontal support pin 231b is formed longer than the damper 222 as a whole because the distance from the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i is the same as the length of the damper 222 . The pair of front support pins 231c are insertable into the tubular damper 222 and formed slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222 .

The upper end of the central support projection 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in the shape of a truncated cone having a square outer periphery. The two receiving projections 231 e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230 b of the mounting base 230 . The front peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and the rear peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e is inclined forward relative to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a as it goes downward. and extended. In addition, the left and right outer peripheral walls of the receiving projection 231e are inclined with respect to the perpendicular to the surface of the housing recess 231a so that the lower ends (tips) of the receiving projection 231e are slightly closer to each other. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230 . In the assembled state, the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through hole 230b of the mounting base 230 at its lower end, and a small gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

The upper plate front decorative member 234 has its front surface exposed to the outside when the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for decorating the upper plate rear decorative member 236 with light emission, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237 with light emission. .

The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer in the left and right than the upper plate rear decorative member 236, and has a light receiving portion 237a disposed above the plurality of peripheral edge LEDs 235b of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235, and the light receiving portion 237a. and a flat plate-like linear light emitting portion 237b that is continuous with the unit case 231 and that is fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 . The linear light-emitting lens member 237 has the linear light-emitting portion 237b fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237b forms part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside when the dish unit 200 is assembled. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive light from the peripheral LED 235b at the light receiving portion 237a, guide the light received at the light receiving portion 237a to the linear light emitting portion 237b, The entire top end can be illuminated (linearly).

The upper dish ball extracting button 239 is attached by a button attaching member 238 so as to be vertically slidable, and has an extending piece 239a extending downward from the button attaching member 238. As shown in FIG. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 239 downward, the upper tray ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 from the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B with dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two projections 231e protruding downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 below the unit case 231 into which the lower ends of the projections 231e are inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that moves the unit case 231 downward acts from the touch unit 220B side, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side by the bottom surface of the concave portion 231a bending downward to some extent and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e coming into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. That is, since the unit case 231 bends when force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230 , the force can be transmitted to the mounting base 230 after being attenuated to some extent by the bending.

Further, the receiving protrusion 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, part of the force transmitted from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a on which the cylindrical receiving portion 230c is provided. do. As a result, the force from the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 with an open top, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted inside the lower case 240 from above, A pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on both left and right outer sides of the upper liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 , and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper side of the upper liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered, and attached to the lower case 240 . A shallow box-shaped base member 243 with an opening, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 which is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 to display images, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-like ground metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer periphery, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and a lower case that covers the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from above and passes through the base member 243. and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 attached to the 240 .

In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surfaces of the assembled lower case 240, base member 243, and upper cover 247. It is provided with a sheet-like waterproof seal 248 that extends over substantially the entire left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like, and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240 , the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 . ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodation recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular substrate mounting portion 240 a extending left and right, flat plate-like projections 240 b projecting from both left and right sides of the substrate mounting portion 240 a in a trapezoidal shape, and each projection 240 b extending to the outer diameter of the damper 222 . A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically pierced with the same inner shape as the damper mounting recesses 240c and which are partly opened to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and the damper mounting recesses 240c protrude from the inner peripheral surface of and a vibrating device mounting portion 240e to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted, which is arranged near the substrate mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting portion 240b.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. In addition, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at substantially the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As shown in FIG.

The vibrating device 242 includes a small vibrating drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotating shaft of the vibrating drive motor 242a with its center of gravity eccentric. The vibrating device 242 can generate vibration by rotating a weight 242b with a vibrating drive motor 242a.

The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a formed in a shallow box shape into which the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above, extension portions 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates vertically at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and whose upper side is counterbored with a large diameter is formed at the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. and a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 40) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 allows the distal end side of the horizontal support pin 231b in the unit case 231 to pass through the taper portion 231i, and the base end side (lower side) of the taper portion 231i. It is formed in such a size that it cannot pass through.

The touch panel 246 includes tempered glass that is resistant to impact and does not break easily, a capacitive transparent sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

In the touch unit 220B, the dampers 222 can be attached by inserting the dampers 222 into the damper attachment recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240 from the open side of the C shape. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222 . As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper attachment recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extension 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is positioned below the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. protrude.

Also, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration drive motors 242a of the pair of vibration devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. As shown in FIG. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can generate vibration independently.

In addition, the touch unit 220B allows an image displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 to be viewed from above through the touch panel 246 . Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 as if operating the button of the image.

Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a waterproof seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid is prevented from entering the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged due to intrusion of liquid.

[3-1d-3. button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the button unit 220C of the production operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 of the attachment base unit 220A. A production button decoration board 251 arranged on the side and provided with LEDs on the upper surface, and a board cover 252 covering the lower side of the production button decoration board 251 and attached to the lower side of the unit body 250 are provided.

The button unit 220C includes a cylindrical button base 253 inserted into the unit main body 250 so as to be slidable from the upper side, and a button base 253 disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached upward. a spring member 254 for biasing; a light guide member 255 inserted into the button base 253 and capable of guiding upward the light from the LED of the production button decoration board 251; a sheet-like diffuser lens member 256 equipped with a prism, a light-transmitting upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffuser lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. A performance button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end is provided.

The unit body 250 has three attachment pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf portion 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , and a pair of through holes 250c passing through the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf portion 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a, and an upper tubular portion 253b. A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and that the lower end can pass through the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and that protrudes outward from the lower end and can engage (abut) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. and a pair of engaging claws 253c projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end so that the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward in a flat plate shape from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. ing.

The spring member 254 is a coil spring as shown. The lower end of the spring member 254 contacts the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit body 250 , and the upper end of the spring member 254 is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253 d of the button base 253 .

The light guide member 255 has a disk-shaped main body portion 255a fitted to the upper portion of the upper cylindrical portion 253b of the button base 253, and extends downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to near the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253. A plurality of cylindrical light guide portions 255b are provided. A plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration board 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

This button unit 220C is integrally assembled with a button base 253, a light guide member 255, a diffusion lens member 256, and a top plate effect button main body, which can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. can. These button bases 253 and the like project upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 extend upward from the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, any further rise is regulated, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the rising end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like descend, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper plate effect button 257 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. A pressing operation of the plate effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 descends by pressing the upper tray effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further descent is restricted. , the top tray effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

In addition, the button unit 220C can light-embellish the top plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the top plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

[3-1d-4. Features of production operation unit]
As shown in FIG. 40, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is assembled so that the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is positioned above the lower surface of the lower case 240. Also protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. In addition, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 are aligned with the bottom surfaces of the counterbore of the screw holes 243c of the base member 243. Movement is restricted by a flat washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed onto the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. A tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the horizontal support pin 231b and a tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

41, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the lateral support pin 231b side. protruding upwards. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the bottom surface of the lower case 240, the top surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the bottom A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support projection 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240 . In other words, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with its lower surface floating in the air due to the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on both left and right sides.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 220 is inserted into a cylindrical receiving portion 230c in the shape of a pyramidal tube that narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Accordingly, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer circumference of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inner side of the unit case 231 (center side of the accommodation recess 231a) floating in the air.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30 and the like, the effect operation unit 220 has a linear ( band) is exposed. The length of the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is about ⅔ of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. A top plate rear decorative member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, a top plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the top plate rear decorative member 236 when viewed from the front. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B in front view.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the top plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

As the image displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, an image simulating an operation button is displayed, and detection of a touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be received. An operation button can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The images displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 during the performance using the touch panel 246 are not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported in a floating state from the unit case 231 by a plurality of dampers 222, the touch unit 220B can be moved by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the game state. It can vibrate. During the performance using the touch panel 246, by vibrating the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) with the vibration device 242, the vibration of the vibration device 242 is applied to the player's finger, hand, or the like in contact with the touch panel 246. It is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is operating a physical operation button even though the image operation button is being operated, and the touch panel 246 and the vibration are produced. can be enjoyed by the player and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 220 is provided with a button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B in front view, the player is caused to press the top plate effect button 257 according to the game state, and the top plate effect button 257 is pressed. You can enjoy the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 tend to lack operational feeling compared to actual operation buttons because they only touch the touch panel 246. Therefore, the operation of the top tray performance button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the top tray performance button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. .

Since the effect operation unit 220 is arranged in a portion of the plate unit 200 protruding forward where the upper plate 201 is provided, the game can be played even when the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C is not used during the effect. A person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the damper 222 is elastic. The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and an impact (load) acts from above, it is transmitted to the dampers 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the touch unit 220B descends while the dampers 222 is compressed. The shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 into which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B descends. The damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed not only by the dampers 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b but also by the dampers 222 supported by the front support pins 231c.

When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B abuts against the bottom surfaces on both the left and right sides of the accommodation recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support projection 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222 .

Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B descends, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 bends due to the load from the central support projection 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. As the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a bends, the pair of receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward from the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a descends. When the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e abuts against the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, thereby causing the touch unit 220B to move downward. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230 .

Since the outer peripheral wall of the projecting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the tubular receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramidal shape that tapers downward, from the projecting portion 231e to the tubular receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is dispersed in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. In this way, since the structure for absorbing the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in multiple layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be made less likely to be damaged by the impact.

In addition, the effect operation unit 220 is driven by the peripheral edge LED 235b of the upper plate rear decoration board 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be linearly illuminated. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 lights up the upper plate rear decorative member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch unit 220B (the rear side of the linear light emitting portion 237b). can be made By luminous decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the interest of the player is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, similarly to the light emission of the linear light emitting part 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. can be performed, and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper tray liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231, and the upper tray lower covering portion 262 of the tray unit cover 260, which will be described later. A waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, in the upper plate 201, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 and the game ball due to contact with the outside air flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). , it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, thereby preventing the touch unit 220B from malfunctioning.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the rear plate decoration substrate 235 for decorating the rear plate decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 with light emission is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the plate 201. Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, the rear decorative substrate 235 of the upper plate is prevented from being short-circuited or corroded.

[3-1e. Plate unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a shell-like shape that extends left and right, bulges forward at the left and right centers, and opens rearward. . The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 which opens forward at approximately the center of the left and right sides and whose rear end is closed by the plate unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. and an upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220, and the bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 that is arranged on the left side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view A speaker grill 263 that transmits sound from the speaker, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged above the speaker grill 263 and decorated with light emission by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and is arranged on the right side of the lower dish opening 261 in front view. A handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, a bottom plate portion 266 forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 260 and covering the lower side of the lower plate body 214, and a bottom plate at the center of the left and right. and a bottom plate opening 267 that vertically penetrates the portion 266 and is closed by the lower tray ball removing unit 320 .

The bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower tray opening 261 is closed by the lower tray main body 214 . The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate.

The plate unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. In addition, the right side in front view has translucency almost entirely.

When the plate unit cover 260 is assembled with the plate unit 200, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 are separated from each other so that it can be grasped with one hand. As a result, when the player performs a touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, thereby stabilizing the touch finger (hand or arm). can be easily performed.

More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the thickness between the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm. The thickness from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Also, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player's hand to grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 .

[3-1f. Door lower right direction unit]
As shown in FIGS. 42 to 49, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is arranged above the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 220, and rotates according to the game state. A spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for decoration with light emission is provided. The door lower right effect unit 270 is attached to a unit base 271 which is attached so as to close the escape port 210g on the front surface of the plate unit base 210 and which rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotating shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshing with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotor 270A, and a driven gear 274 and a shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271 .

Further, the door lower right effect unit 270 is attached to the driven gear 274 on the opposite side of the door lower right rotor 270A and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 that cooperates with the unit base 271 to rotatably support the side of the rotating body 270A opposite to the driven gear 274, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side of the door lower right rotating body 270A when viewed from the front, and a rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front side. A door lower right base decorative board 280 having a plurality of LEDs, a door lower right drive motor 272 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative board 280, and a door described later. A door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between the lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and the peripheral control board 4140 is provided.

Door lower right rotating body 270A constitutes an outer shell and is arranged between front outer shell member 285 and rear outer shell member 286, which are hemispherical shell-shaped, respectively, and front outer shell member 285 and rear outer shell member 286. and a rotator internal unit 290 . The front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a, respectively, centering on the rotation shaft. The front outer shell member 285 includes a belt decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in a belt shape in the circumferential direction on a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface, and a heart-shaped decoration arranged in the center of the belt decoration 285b. heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in a band shape in the circumferential direction on the translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface. The band decoration 285b of the front shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear shell member 286 are formed to be connected when the front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are put together.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 which is disk-shaped and has a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 It is mounted on the opposite side of the door lower right rotor decoration board 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotor decoration board 291 . and a second fixed shaft member 293 of Although not shown, a wiring cord is inserted inside the second fixed shaft member 293 to connect the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotator decoration board 291 .

In addition, the rotating body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative base plate 291, and is attached to the inner side of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A transparent flat reflector base 294 having an annular shape is provided. , a first reflector 295 attached to the reflector base 294 and having an annular shape and opening outward in the axial direction, and a first reflector 295 attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring and having a hexagonal shape at the center. and a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer with metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect the light from the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 . In addition, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat plate-like ribs extending radially.

This rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, They are separated from each other so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 271 includes an annular ring portion 271a arranged on the rear side of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and a flat plate shape extending forward from a portion obliquely upper right in a front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a. a first projecting piece 271b projecting outward, a second projecting piece 271c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer circumference of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and the second projecting piece 271c and a bearing groove 271d into which the front end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state in which the rotating shaft passes therethrough. The driven gear 274 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 273 . The shaft member 275 includes an attachment portion 275a attached to the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b projecting in a tubular shape from the attachment portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotor-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271 so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotating body 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 278 detect the rotational position where the heart decoration 285c of the door lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 49(a)) and the rotational position where the heart decoration 285c faces backward (FIG. 49(b)). ) can be detected, respectively.

The door lower right effect unit 270 of this embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward. Depending on whether or not, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached to the door lower right effect unit 270, during the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A, the door right side is displayed. When the lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 (the LED thereof) emits light, the position of the light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 move. Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is decorated with light so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED of the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Alternatively, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be decorated with rainbow colors by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, thereby entertaining the player.

[3-1g. Production unit cover]
The effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200, as shown in FIGS. , a decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 in front view, and a locking unit 700 penetrating back and forth at the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301. and a cylinder insertion opening 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

The production unit cover 300 has a container-like shape with an open rear and is translucent. In this effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover part 301 is illuminated by the door lower right base decorative board 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover part 301 is decorated with the dish unit right decorative board 346. decorated with luminescence.

[3-1h. Upper plate ball removal unit]
As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having a vertically long box shape with an open top and an insertion opening 311a through which an extending piece 239a of an upper tray ball extracting button 239 can be inserted; A front base member 312 attached at a position on the upper left in a front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper tray ball release button 239, and a pressure transmission member. and a first spring member 314 that biases 313 in the direction in which the upper tray ball removal button 239 rises.

The upper tray ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 210 so as to close the upper tray ball feed opening 210d of the tray unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member 315. 315 and the plate unit base 210, and is attached to the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down, and is in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from above; and a second spring member 317 biasing the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 includes a flat plate-like base portion 312a that extends parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311, and a pair of flat plate-like extensions that extend forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. A protruding piece 312b, a shaft supporting portion 312c recessed rearward in a U shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and a rear end of a first spring member 314 are provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a. and a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The pressure transmitting member 313 has a laterally elongated columnar shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension portion extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. A protruding piece 313b and an upwardly extending piece 313c that extends upward in a flat plate shape from near the left end of the upper surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b in a front view, and that can abut the lower end of the extending piece 239c of the upper tray ball extraction button 239. , a downwardly extending piece 313d that extends downward from the right end in front view of the bottom surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b in a flat plate shape, and a first spring that protrudes downward from the lower side near the left end in front view of the shaft portion 313a. and a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can come into contact with the upper dish ball extracting slider 316. As shown in FIG.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape parallel to the rear surface of the dish unit base 210 and is attached to the dish unit base 210. The rear base member 315 is provided on the front surface of the base portion 315a so as to be separated from each other to the left and right. The slider support portion 315b slidably supports both the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and the upper end of the base portion 315a is opened forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210. It has an upper entrance 315c that opens downward on the rear side of the base portion 315a and through which game balls can flow.

Further, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d extending downward continuously from the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and being open rearward and having a lower end curved rearward. A second L-shaped guideway 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the first guideway 315d and then extends to the left in front view, the left end of which is open to the left, and the entirety of which is open to the rear; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f that closes the rear end side of the leftwardly extending portion of the guideway 315e and the L-shaped second guideway 315e. It has an opening 315g penetrating therethrough, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and locks the upper end of the second spring member 317. As shown in FIG.

The L-shaped second guideway 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that the portion extending leftward becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 50(b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210. The lower plate ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper disk ball removal slider 316 has a flat plate-like slider base 316a which is slidably supported by slider support portions 315b of a rear base member 315 at both right and left ends, and a disk extending forward from the left side of the center of the upper end of the slider base 316a in a front view. A transmitting piece 316b which extends upward through the opening 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the upper surface of the receiving piece 210f with the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d of the pressure transmitting member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmitting piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c projecting downward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring engagement projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and engaging the lower end of the second spring member 317. and a stopping portion 316d.

In the upper tray ball removing unit 310, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 opens at the lower end of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper tray main body 212 on the right side in front view when the tray unit 200 is assembled. Thereby, the game ball in the upper tray 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper entrance 315c through the first guide path 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

In addition, when the upper tray ball removing button 239 is pressed downward in the upper tray ball removing unit 310 , the extension piece 239 a of the upper tray ball removing button 239 causes the pressure transmitting member 313 to resist the biasing force of the first spring member 314 . Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in a downward moving direction. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact with the transmitting piece 316b of the upper bowl ball extracting slider 316 to pull out the upper bowl ball. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317 .

By sliding the upper tray ball extracting slider 316 downward, the operation transmission part 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feeding unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feeding unit 540, thereby switching the first guideway. 315d side will be in the state connected with the second guideway 315e side. As a result, the game balls in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 210c to the lower tray 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guideway 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guideway 315e. , the game ball in the upper tray 201 can be pulled out.

In addition, when the downward pressure on the ball removing button 239 is released, the biasing force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317 raises the ball removing slider 316 and the ball removing button 239. It can be restored to its original state.

[3-1i. Lower plate ball removal unit]
As shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the lower tray ball removing unit 320 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the tray unit cover 260. A flat plate-shaped lower pan ball extractor base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the punch hole 214a, and a flat plate-shaped slide lid 322 which can slide left and right on the lower pan ball extractor base 321 to close the opening 321a. a knob portion 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the plate unit cover 260; A member 324 and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 at the position where the opening 321a is opened against the biasing force of the spring member 324 are provided.

The opening 321a of the lower tray ball extracting base 321 is formed at a position near the right side of the left and right in the front view. By attaching the lower tray ball removing base 321 to the lower tray main body 214 , the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported to the left and right between the lower tray ball removing base 321 and the lower tray main body 214 . The slide lid 322 has a holding protrusion 322a held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower tray ball extracting base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b protruding from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and capable of gripping the holding projections 322a. In the holding device 325, when the holding projections 322a are inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325b and pressed toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b are closed to hold the holding projections 322a, and the pair of holding claws 325b are closed. The pawl 325b remains closed. In this state, when the holding protrusion 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b are opened, and the holding of the holding protrusion 322a is released.

In the lower tray ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is positioned between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower tray main body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in front view. The game balls in the lower tray 202 can be stored in the lower tray 202 without falling downward from the ball removal hole 214a.

From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower tray 202 can pass through the ball extraction hole 214a and the opening 321a to the bottom of the tray unit 200, and the game ball in the lower tray 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding protrusions 322a of the slide lid 322 are held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob 323 is stopped. You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, the knob 323 is slightly moved to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b to release the holding protrusions 322a, and the biasing force of the spring member 324 slides the slide lid 322 to the right. to close the ball removal hole 214a. Thus, by operating the knob 323 of the lower tray ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower tray 202, or the game balls stored in the lower tray 202 can be removed.

[3-1j. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200, as shown in FIGS. A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player, a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player, A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333 is provided.

This ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and presses a ball lending button 332 to deposit a predetermined number of game balls into the tray unit. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper tray 201, and when a return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the lent cash and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the balance of the lent amount. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, or the like.

[3-1k. Upper plate top decorative member]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is a light-transmitting upper plate top lens that is attached to the center of the upper end of the plate unit base 210 in the left-right direction and extends in the left-right direction. 340a, and an upper plate top decoration substrate 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the upper surface thereof.

The upper plate top decorative member 340 can cause the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a belt shape by causing the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b to emit light. Since this upper tray top decorative member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 220, it can be used as the upper tray top decorative member in the same manner as the light emitting decoration such as the upper tray rear decorative member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237. By decorating the 340 with light, the interest of the player can be attracted to the performance operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the performance presented by the performance operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

[3-1 l. Characteristic Actions and Effects of the Dish Unit]
The plate unit 200 of this embodiment has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by hitting Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper tray rear decorative member 236, the upper tray top decorative member 340, etc. can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (visual field) can be seen. The light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from the outside can be noticed, and the line of sight (interest) of the player can be attracted to the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 side. Therefore, in the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, when an effect such as an image is presented according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light so that the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 can be displayed to the player. It is possible to make the user aware of the presentation of the performance, and to enjoy the performance by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, it is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 that is being used, the player is given a game within the game area 5a and an effect on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. It can make you care about both. Therefore, by making the player pay attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, thereby reducing the interest of the player. In addition, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light to direct the player to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to attract the player's attention, and to surely recognize the arrival of the chance to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, there is a risk that the player will be concerned about both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a, and will not be able to concentrate on either of them, resulting in a decrease in interest. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in response to the arrival of the player, the user can concentrate on the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, thereby enjoying the game in the game area 5a. At the same time, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the performance on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened to prevent boredom.

In addition, since the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is provided on the plate unit 200 which protrudes toward the player side below the game area 5a, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by the player positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is less visible to other players next to or behind. Only the player concerned can be entertained with the effect presented by the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in being looked at by other players while enjoying the performance by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when presenting the presentation by the 244, it is difficult to miss the presentation by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the presentation by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and interesting. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens members 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous compared to the case where they are made to emit light in the form of dots. Even if the player's consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emitted from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be easily noticed, and the effect of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in a strip shape, the light emission mode differs from the light emission of other light-emitting decorations, etc., and it is possible to reduce misidentification as light emission from light-emitting decorations, etc. The light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like can be surely noticed.

In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear side position near the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, The light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of view, and the player can be made aware of the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like to enjoy the performance of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 .

In addition, an effect operation unit 220 having an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like. Since the player turns his or her line of sight to the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency in order to check the amount of game balls to be inserted, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. It is easy to enter the field of view and it becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 . In addition, since the player turns his or her line of sight toward the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from within the game area 5a to the upper tray 201 (upper tray liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when noticing the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like, the line of sight can be immediately shifted to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the performance presented by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the game area 5a, and the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is irradiated to the player from the lower side, when it is arranged on the upper side of the game area 5a , the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like can be easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to surely draw the player's attention to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the performance by the operation unit 200.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper tray liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. Even so, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, it is possible to perform not only the effect by the image but also the effect of allowing the player to operate the touch panel 246, so that the player can be entertained by various effects. By making the player operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the production, and the player can be actively entertained with the production, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 (linear light-emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge of the rear side of the touch unit 220B sends the game ball on the upper tray 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper tray ball extracting button 239 for operating the upper tray ball extracting unit 310 is arranged along the feeding guide passage portion 212a and between the guide passage portion 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player checks the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at the position where the player cares even during the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, attract the player's interest to the touch unit 220B, and produce an effect by the touch unit 220B (an effect image by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, an effect image by the touch panel 246, etc.). touch operation, etc.) can be made easier to notice.

Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. , and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Even if the condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (upper upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the rear plate decoration substrate 235 for decorating the rear plate decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 with light emission is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the plate 201. Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, the rear decorative substrate 235 of the upper plate is prevented from being short-circuited or corroded.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, when the touch unit 220B provided with the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibrating device 242, the touch unit 220B is divided into a plurality (two). Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates. 246, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B and suggests the timing of operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the operation performance by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B.

Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from below by a plurality of dampers 222, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above or pushed strongly and an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the dampers 222 Since the shock or the like can be absorbed, damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A or the like due to the shock or the like can be reduced, and the game is prevented from being interrupted due to damage to the touch unit 220B or the like. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the portion of the touch unit 220B to be operated is the touch panel 246, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when the touch unit 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's fingers (hands). Therefore, since the player can feel that the player is operating the touch panel 246 by vibrating the player's finger, it is possible to give a sufficient operational feeling, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest in the subject.

In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, making it possible to respond to various effects. Diverse performances make the player less likely to get bored, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is provided with a touch panel 246, it is possible to perform touch, tap (single-tap, double-tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch-out, pinch-in), swipe, and touch-and-touch functions compared to conventional press buttons. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, it is possible to perform more diverse operation presentations, entertain the player, and prevent the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as to be immovable upward and movable downward. is pressed against the upper movement end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move during operation of the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately and easily. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, the player can be made to think that the touch unit 220B does not move. Vibration by the device 242 can startle the player, amuse the player, and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 spaced apart from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the portion operated by the player on the touch panel 246, a strong vibration is generated. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player can be notified that the operation is wrong. is possible, the player can be made to perform correct operations, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by enjoying the operation performance using the touch panel 246.例文帳に追加

In addition, since a plurality of vibrating devices 242 are provided that are spaced apart from each other, it is possible to generate a resonance phenomenon at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency, strength, etc. of the vibration of each vibrating device 242 . can be done. Therefore, by controlling each vibrating device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further sense of operation and greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is hit or pushed strongly from above and an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the dampers 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B can absorb (attenuate) the impact from above to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the mounting base 230 on the lower side, the shock, load, etc. from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. can be widely distributed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the unit case 231 and the inner peripheral wall, the projecting portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to the impact or load from the touch unit 220B. As a result, the shock or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230 , and the bending of the unit case 231 further attenuates the shock or the like before it is transmitted to the mounting base 230 . Since the outer peripheral wall of the projecting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the projecting portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the projecting portion 231e (unit case) 231) side impact, load, or the like is transmitted obliquely to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and is transmitted in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above or is strongly pushed, the shock or the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

[3-2. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 54-56. FIG. 54(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame, and FIG. 54(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 55(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 55(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the lid member removed. Furthermore, FIG. 56 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed.

The foul cover unit 520 of this embodiment is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and having an open front side, and is attached to the front surface of the unit body 522. A flat lid member 524 is provided. The foul cover unit 520 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner in a front view, and is a penetration ball that connects the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 210a of the tray unit 200. a passage 526, a full ball receptacle 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through ball passage 526 in front view and can communicate with the full guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the body frame 4; It has

In addition, the foul cover unit 520 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 528 when viewed from the front and does not reach the game area 5a even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 530 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a full ball receiving port 528 and a foul ball receiving port 530 which are open forward at the lower right corner in a front view and release the game balls received in the foul ball receiving port 530. and a ball discharge port 532 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524, and is formed between a full ball receiving port 528, a foul ball receiving port 530, and a ball discharge port 532, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible width, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 534 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, and a movable A full tank detection sensor 535 that detects the rotation of the piece 534 in the direction away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 that biases the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

The foul cover unit 520 will remain inside the storage passage 533 to some extent when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side. The number of game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 due to the weight of the game balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the tank is full, further payout of game balls is stopped. The fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 522 and the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 526, and serves as a guideway opening/closing door of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening/closing abutting portion 537 is provided with which the operating protrusion 863e of the 863 can abut (see FIG. 79). The door opening/closing contact portion 537 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening/closing abutting portion 537 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863 abuts thereon. When the actuating projection 863e of the taxiway opening/closing door 863 contacts the door opening/closing contact portion 537, the taxiway opening/closing door 863 rotates, and the downstream ends (front openings) of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 ) can be released.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 of this embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in front view are provided. .

The body frame 4 is attached to the front lower part of the body frame base 600, and has a ball launching device 680 for hitting game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5. A locking unit 700 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side along the upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out game balls to the player side, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a main body attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. A rear cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The main body frame base 600 has a game board insertion opening 601 which penetrates in the front and rear direction from a position slightly below the upper end to a height range of about 3/4 of the total height, and into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side. A game board placement portion 602 forming the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right bottom end of the game board 5 protruding upward from the center of the game board placement portion 602 in the left-right direction. and a game board regulation section 603 that regulates backward movement.

In addition, the main body frame 4 includes a shooting device attachment portion 604 for attaching a ball shooting device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a shooting device attachment portion 604 on the right side of the shooting device attachment portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a bass speaker of the board unit 900 that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. , and a circular speaker opening 607 that penetrates front and back at the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. and have.

Further, the body frame 4 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 when viewed from the front. It has a rearward extension 608 which is Further, the body frame 4 is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view on the rear surface, and has an upper hinge mounting portion 609 and a lower hinge for mounting the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 . A mounting portion 610 is provided.

In addition, the body frame 4 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that can open and close the connection opening 606, and a position slightly lower left than the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, A game board lock member 616 capable of regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame side upper hinge member and body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame 4, respectively.

The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 621. A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and a left side of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 in front view penetrates the upper hinge body 621 and pivotally supports the door frame side upper hinge member 140. and a door frame upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 includes a lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent upward into an L shape, and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 vertically penetrates. The outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first body 641. A lower hinge second body 643 and a lower hinge second body 643 penetrate vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second body 643 to connect the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge hole 644 for pivoting and the door frame lower hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 643 extend upward from the left end behind the door frame. 3 and a restricting piece 645 for restricting the rotation range.

The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641, and is bent upward to form the lower hinge first body 641. It abuts on the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641 . The body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame 4 at the upwardly bent portions of the lower hinge first body 641 and the lower hinge second body 643 .

[4-3. Reinforcing frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG. The reinforcement frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 . The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, in the reinforcement frame 660, the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end restricts the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and the left side of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is passed through. Incorrect tool insertion can be prevented.

[4-4. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57, 59 and 60. FIG. The ball shooting device 680 is a device for hitting game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 . In this ball shooting device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 includes a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid extending through and extending forward, a ball hitting mallet 683 having a proximal end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and extending obliquely upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip of the ball hitting mallet 683. A shooting rail 684 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 681 so as to allow the game balls to roll thereon.

This ball launching device 680 is configured such that game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle lever 504 is rotated, the shooting solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the ball hitting mallet 683 hits the game ball. The game ball hit by the ball hitting mallet 683 passes through the launch rail 684, is guided by the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) of the game board 5, and is hit into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball, etc., there is a gap between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). , the ball drops into the foul ball socket 530 of the foul cover unit 520 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 520, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-5. locking unit]
A locking unit 700 for the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame 4 and can lock the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 . The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locks protruding forward from the unit base 701 and capable of locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 that protrude backward from the unit base 701 and can be engaged with the outer frame 2, and a columnar shape that protrudes forward from the lower portion of the unit base 701 from the front side. A key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the door frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703 according to the rotation direction of the inserted unlocking key is provided.

[4-6. Payout unit]
A payout unit 800 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 72. FIG. 61 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Also, FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 65(a) is a front perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit, and FIG. 65(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball guiding unit. Furthermore, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. FIG. 67(a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, and FIG. 67(b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing device. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 70(a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in (a). Also, FIG. 71(a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 71(b) is an explanatory view showing the state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. is. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the dispensing blade in the dispensing device.

Also, FIG. 73(a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 73(b) is a back perspective view of the upper full ball path unit. Also, FIG. 74(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 74(b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit and viewed from the back. be. Further, FIG. 75(a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball path unit in the dispensing unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 78(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is closed in the lower full-tank ball route unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening/closing door is open. . FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment includes an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and an upper portion of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 is a box-shaped opening that extends leftward and rightward and stores game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the landing ball tank 802 to the left in a front view is provided. Inside the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left and arranged in front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 80) swingably hanging down from above.

In addition, the payout unit 800 includes a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to a payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by a ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on instructions from a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950. and has. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, the game balls circulate in two rows, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830. - 特許庁

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides downward the game balls paid out by the payout device 830, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e; A normal guiding path 861 guides forward the game ball discharged from the front end of the door frame 3 to the penetrating ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guides forward the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e to guide the game ball forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A full-tank guideway 862 that guides to the full-tank ball receptacle 528, and a guideway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a lower full ball path unit 860 with

[4-6a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 extending vertically and having an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and having an open front side, and a front case. 821 and a rear case 822, and a flat plate-shaped partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822; A rod-shaped shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of front movable piece member 825 and rear movable piece member 826 which are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case and the rear case, respectively. , and a dead ball detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of a pair of front movable piece member 825 and rear movable piece member 826 .

The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that game balls can pass through, and a ball guide outlet that is open at a position to the right of the center of the bottom in the left-right direction so that game balls can pass through. 821b, and a guide passage 821c that communicates with the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b and allows game balls to flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d that obliquely extends from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a middle height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering manner across the width of the front case 821 from the detection portion 821e. Further, the front case 821 has a notch portion 821g on the wall on the right side of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

The rear case 822 has a ball guide inlet 822a which is open at the upper part of the right side so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet 822a which is open at a position to the right of the center of the bottom in the left-right direction so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guide passage 822c that communicates the ball guide inlet 822a and the ball guide outlet 822b and allows game balls to flow. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d that obliquely extends from the ball guide inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a middle height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering manner across the width of the rear case 822 from the detection portion 822e. In addition, the rear case 822 has a notch portion 822g on the wall on the right side of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the front case 821 in the left-right direction, and the guide passages 821c and 822c are formed to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction when the ball guide unit 820 is assembled. there is

The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically extending flat plate-like movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that passes through the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extending portion 825c extends rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a perpendicularly to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having through holes projecting outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and near the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the extending portion 825c. A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the dead ball detection sensor 827, and a flat plate shape that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. and a stopper piece 825g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the front movable piece member 825 rotates by its own weight so that the weight mounting portion 825e projecting from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, when the ball guide unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guide passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is closed. It comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c (the detection portion 821e). Since the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the front movable piece 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a toward the wall of the guide passage 821c (to the right in front view), the left surface of the movable piece 825a moves toward the wall of the guide passage 821c. match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f of the front movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the dead ball detection sensor 827. As shown in FIG. In other words, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is non-detected.

The rear movable piece member 826 includes a flat movable piece 826a that extends vertically, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. The extending portion 826c extends rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a perpendicularly to the right surface of the movable piece 826a. A connection portion 826d, a weight attachment portion 826e having a through-hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extension portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connection portion 826d and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the extension portion 826c. A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and can be detected by the dead ball detection sensor 827, and a flat plate shape that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d. and a stopper piece 826g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the rear movable piece member 826 rotates by its own weight so that the weight mounting portion 826e projecting from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, when the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is closed. It comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (the detection portion 822e). Since the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from rotating further in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (leftward in front view). When the lower end of the movable piece 826a of the rear movable piece 826 is rotated in a direction (rightward in front view) to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a moves toward the wall of the guide passage 822c. match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the rear movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. As shown in FIG. In other words, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is non-detected.

The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls lined up in a line in the front and rear direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case 821 in the state where the game balls are lined in a line. 822 can be guided in two rows one behind the other to a dispenser 830 below (see FIG. 80). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls circulating through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can be circulated well. can be done.

Also, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a A front movable piece member 825 and a rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is found that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

When the game balls are paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guide unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d are moved to the movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Due to the contact of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate, and the vibration causes the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c to get caught or enter. It is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have fallen on the surface, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated satisfactorily by their own weight and the like.

In addition, the ball guide unit 820 detects game balls flowing through the guide passages 821c and 822c by means of separate front and rear movable piece members 825 and 826, respectively. Since the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the rear movable piece member 826 are detected by one ball-out detection sensor 827, when there are no game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the front of the movable piece member The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the rear 825 or the movable piece member 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is gone are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. be. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the running out of game balls at an early stage, the game balls can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826, the weight of the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 and the weight can be reduced. Thus, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in a direction projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is removed. , dirt, etc. will not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt will not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be prevented from rotating properly.

In this way, the ball guide unit 820 of the present embodiment has movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 that protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls circulate due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that contacts the game ball, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight make the movable piece The lower end sides of 825a and 826a can be made easier to rotate (project) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passage 822c and the lower ends protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt in the guide passages 821c and 822c are removed. etc. will not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt will not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (front movable piece member 825 and rear movable piece member 826) can be prevented from rotating.

In addition, since metal screws serving as weights are screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e, which are through holes, even if the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 are frequently rotated, the weight will not move. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 (weight mounting portions 825e and 826e) do not come off, and the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. . In addition, weights can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thus simplifying the work of attaching the weights. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the introduction part 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a is provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the guiding When the game ball flows through the passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the contact of the game ball can vibrate the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and other debris caught or entered between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed. The front piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 can be rotated well.

Therefore, since the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 run out of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. It is possible to replenish the game balls at the same time, and by shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. FIG. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and has a payout inlet 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass through, and an opening near the left end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass through. a ball withdrawal outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in a front view so that game balls can pass therethrough; and a payout passage 831d that communicates the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b and allows game balls to flow. , and a ball extraction passage 831e that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c, through which game balls can flow. It has a box shape with an open front side, a payout port 832a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the top surface so that game balls can pass through, and a payout port 832a that is open near the left end of the bottom face when viewed from the front so that game balls can pass through. An exit 832b, a ball extraction exit 832c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in a front view so that game balls can pass through, a payout passage 832d that communicates between the payout inlet 832a and the payout outlet 832b and allows game balls to flow, and a payout A rear box 832 having a ball extraction passage 832e branching from the middle of the passage 832d and communicating with a ball extraction outlet 832c through which game balls can flow is provided.

Dispensing device 830 includes shallow box-shaped front cover 833 which is attached to the front side of front box 831 and has an open rear side, and front cover 833 which is attached to front box 831 and whose rotating shaft penetrates front box 831. A payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with each other to be rotatable between the front box 831 and the front cover 833. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 are rotatably penetrated. A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front case 831 and is attached to the rear case 832, and dispensing passages 831d and 832d of the front case 831 and the rear case 832, which are rotatably attached by penetrating the shaft member 838. and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 installed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 for detecting the rotation of the delivery blade 839. ing.

Further, the dispensing device 830 includes a flat partition plate 841 mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and separating the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832 . and the rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls paid out by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b, 832b; 831e, 832e are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and the ball removing movable piece 843 capable of closing the ball removing passages 831e, 832e; A ball extracting lever 844 is provided so as to be vertically slidable on the upper part of the right side surface of the box 832 when viewed from the front, and makes the ball extracting movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball extraction outlet 831c, and extends downward at a height of about ⅓ of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. After bending to extend vertically to the left near the center of the total height so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end of the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent like a crank so as to be positioned directly above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the front box 831 from the bottom surface, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. A payout vane 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball extraction passage 831e is formed by further extending a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that extends diagonally to the lower right from the dispensing inlet 831a. It branches up to the height near the center.

In addition, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side in the front view with a guide shelf 831f protruding rearward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 831b in the dispensing passage 831d. A lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down is provided.

A discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the discharge inlet 832a toward the ball extraction outlet 832c, and extends downward at a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. After bending to extend vertically to the left near the center of the total height so as to extend substantially horizontally, it extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the rear box 832 from the left end. and extends perpendicularly to the dispensing outlet 832b so as to be positioned directly above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the bottom surface. A payout vane 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball extraction passage 832e is formed by further extending a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that extends diagonally to the lower right from the dispensing inlet 832a, and is formed from a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed with a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d, and on the upper part of the right side when viewed from the front. A lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball extracting lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down is provided.

The dispensing passages 831d, 832d and the ball extraction passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The delivery passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the delivery vane 839 is arranged. A payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are positioned between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is detected by one payout detection sensor 842 as it is brought near the boundary.

The driven gear 837 has a spur gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836, and radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at intervals of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a and has unevenness formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end thereof and that can be connected to the dispensing blade 839. .

The delivery blade 839 has a cylindrical base portion 839a extending in the front-rear direction, through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. and a plurality of (three) front blades 839b protruding in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a to the front blades 839b ( 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion projecting forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and having projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the front end so as to be connectable with the connecting portion 387c of the driven gear 837. 839d and .

Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the delivery blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. direction and extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees. In the payout blade 839 of this embodiment, three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

Also, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the diameter D1 of their outer peripheries around the axis of the base tube portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a to the portion of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball containing portion 839e) that is closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a. is formed to be approximately 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 72). That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2)/2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0.1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. four times.

Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodation portion 839e).

When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the dispensing vanes 839 of the present embodiment have the front vanes 839b positioned in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear vanes 839c positioned in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. Game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. In addition, the delivery vane 839 is arranged in the delivery passages 831d and 832d at portions bent like a crank below the center of the total height of the front case 831 and the rear case 832. As shown in FIG. More specifically, in the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the dispensing vane 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the overall height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. As shown in FIG. In addition, in portions of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the far side from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and extends from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 61). In this embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arcuate portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

As a result, when the game ball that has flowed down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumference of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. is not discharged downward from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and exits the payout outlets 831b and 832b. emitted downwards.

In addition, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e is used to set the diameter D1 to 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth is set to 1/7 to 1/4, the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 can be made as small as possible and the time required to store the game ball can be shortened. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 839e and sent to the payout exits 831b, 832b. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game balls to be put out per unit time than before, and to shorten the time required for putting out game balls.

The ball-removing movable piece 843 has a body portion 843a that extends vertically and forwards and backwards in a plate-like shape and has a bent lower portion that is formed in a V shape when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical shape that extends forwards and backwards at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, respectively, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the bent outer surface of the body portion 843a, and the body portion 843a. A weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 71) made of a through-hole penetrating back and forth in the bent lower portion is provided.

When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removing movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft tube part 843b at the upper end is positioned to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a portion extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the dispensing inlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly above the downward bending portion. installed in the

In the normal state of the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment, the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 hits the projecting portion 843c of the ball extracting movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. in contact with As a result, the ball removing movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 71(a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 bent in a V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion extends diagonally to the lower left when viewed from the front. extends to The lower end of the main body portion 843a is positioned near the part where the dispensing passages 831d, 832d and the ball extraction passages 831e, 832e branch off. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the left-facing surface of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d. is doing.

The ball removing movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball removing movable piece 843 is positioned on the left side of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b in a normal state when viewed from the front. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise in a front view is applied by , the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball removing lever 844, so the normal state is maintained.

When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843c of the movable ball removing piece 843, and the movable ball removing piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned directly below the shaft tube portion 843b. The ball removing movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower portion of the main body portion 843a contacts the left side surface of the member forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 60(b)). As a result, the ball extraction passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout inlets 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball extraction movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball extraction movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball extraction passages 831e and 832e, and the balls flow through the opened ball extraction passages 831e and 832e and are discharged downward from the ball extraction outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to slide the ball removing lever 844 upward. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is released, the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removing passages 381e and 832e due to the dead weight of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Also, in the normal state in which the ball extraction lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extraction passages 831e and 832e, the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a are pushed into the main body portion 843a of the ball extraction movable piece 843. Since it abuts, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the abutment of the game ball. Therefore, the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843 can remove dust, dirt, etc., which is caught or entered between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e. It is possible to prevent the ball removing movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to being bitten by dust or the like.

In addition, since the metal screw serving as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through-hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight does not move to the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time without being detached from (the weight mounting portion 843d). In addition, the weight can be easily attached to the ball-removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d. can reduce the cost associated with

By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removing movable piece 843 for a long period of time, fine dust may adhere to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft may rust. In some cases, it may be difficult for the pull-out movable piece 843 to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843, so that the ball removing movable piece 843 moves the ball removing path 831e. , 832e are closed, the ball removal lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward to unlock the game ball. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated to reliably open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e.

Therefore, when the ball extracting lever 844 is operated to open the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the ball extracting movable piece 843 can be rotated satisfactorily, so that the game ball extracting operation can be reliably performed. , it is possible to improve workability during maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801 . This upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 with an open rear side, and an upper full tank base 851 attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 with an open front side. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward at the left side of the left and right center in the front view on the top surface so that the game ball can pass through, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the top surface. The upper ball extraction inlet 850b, which is open upward so that the game ball can pass through, is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined width through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a portion other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, and an upper ball storage passage that protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. and a partition piece 850f that partitions the lower part in 850c into the left and right.

In addition, the upper full tank ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball removal passage 850g that guides down the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b, and an upper part that is open downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball extraction outlet 850h is provided. The upper full ball path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball extraction port 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view and opening downward. Also, the upper full-tank ball path unit 850 has a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full-tank base 851 .

When the upper full-tank ball path unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, the upper dispensing ball receiving port 850a is located directly below the dispensing outlet 831b of the dispensing device 830, and the upper ball discharging port 850b is It is positioned directly below the ball extraction outlet 831c of the dispensing device 830. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full ball discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h are normal guideways of the lower full ball path unit 860. 861, a full tank guideway 862, and a lower ball extraction guideway 865 are respectively opened directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 80).

In the upper full-tank ball path unit 850, game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball entering the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal discharge is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c climb over the partition piece 850f and become full. The ball is discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850 e and sent to the lower tray 202 through the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 .

In this way, the upper full ball path unit 850 automatically moves the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 downward from the upper tray 201 in accordance with the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 202 .

[4-6d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. FIG. The lower full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball path unit 850 on the dispensing unit base 801 . The lower full ball path unit 860 guides forward the game balls released from the normal outlet 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 and guides them from the front end to the through ball path 526 of the door frame 3 through a normal guide path 861. , a full-tank guiding path 862 that guides game balls released from the full-tank ball discharge port 850e of the upper full-tank ball path unit 850 forward and guides them from the front end to the full-tank ball receiving port 528 of the door frame 3; A taxiway opening/closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the taxiway 861 and the full-tank taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a closing spring 864 biasing the front end opening of the .

In addition, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and guides them forward from the center right end in the front-rear direction onto the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. A lower ball extractor guideway 865 is provided that discharges to.

In the lower full-tank ball path unit 860, a normal guideway 861, a full-tank guideway 862, and a lower ball-out guideway 865 are arranged in order from left to right in front view. The normal guideway 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower ball extraction guideway 865 are open upward at their rear ends. In addition, the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low with a width where a plurality of game balls are arranged side by side. Further, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861 . These normal guideway 861, full tank guideway 862, and lower ball extraction guideway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided into upper and lower parts, as shown.

The guideway opening/closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotated clockwise in front view by a closing spring 864. energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860, the full-tank guideway 862, which opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guideway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal guideway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The guideway opening/closing door 863 is attached at a position below the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full-tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about a longitudinally extending axis.

The guideway opening/closing door 863 includes a rotatably attached disk-shaped base portion 863a, and a first door plate portion 863b extending obliquely to the upper left from the base portion 863a in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. , a second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full-tank guideway 862; , and an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip of the extension 863d and is capable of coming into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 on the door frame 3 .

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and that the game balls cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short circular arc shape centering on the base portion 863a when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. is doing.

The guideway opening/closing door 863 is urged in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c moves from below the front end opening of the full-tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 of the present embodiment has a front end that includes a through-ball passage 526 in the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3, a full-tank ball receptacle 528, and a door opening/closing contact. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 79). When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening/closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e. , the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. As shown in FIG. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862, closing the front end openings (see FIG. 78). (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guide No game balls are spilled from the path 862 .

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening/closing contact portion 537 of the foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end face of the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening/closing door 863, and the door opening/closing contact portion 537 is operated. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guideway opening/closing door 863 counterclockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 864. As shown in FIG. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 rotate away from the front end openings, and the normal guideway 861 78(b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. .

When the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 are closed. A penetrating ball passage 526 and a full-tank ball socket 528 of the foul cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are positioned in front of the front end opening of the guideway 862. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank ball socket 528 side.

In this manner, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are vertically differentiated, and by rotating the guideway opening/closing door 863, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guidepath 862 are changed. Since it is designed to open and close, the operating range of the taxiway opening/closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening/closing mechanisms of the normal taxiway 861 and the full-tank taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be utilized more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of this embodiment, when the upper plate 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 201, more game balls are released from the payout device 830. is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is filled with game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. When it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guideway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of game balls to the lower tray 202 through the foul cover unit 520 is automatically switched. After that, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower tray 202 is filled with game balls in addition to the upper tray 201, and the lower tray 202 cannot be supplied with game balls, the foul cover unit 520 A game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of . When game balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, which means that the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full of game balls. is notified, and the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is canceled.

It should be noted that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535, for example, until the game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of the foul cover unit 520 until the movable piece 534 is detected In this state, the number that can fill the upstream storage passage 533, the full guideway 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 When the game balls are paid out, the payout device 830 may stop the game ball payout. As a result, a larger number of game balls can be stored than in a conventional pachinko machine, and therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a jackpot game, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are displaced by the payout of game balls. The need to worry about being full of game balls can be reduced, and the player can be entertained by devoting himself to the big win game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
A substrate unit 900 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view and having a bass speaker inside. a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side of the front view and containing a power supply board; An interface control board box 940 containing boards, and a payout control board containing a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls. box 950;

A payout device 830 is controlled by a payout control board 951 housed in a payout control board box 950 .

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 to 88. FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the right, and FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 84(a) is a front view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA cut at the center of the game board. Also, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a panel decoration 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. , a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 2000, and attached to the rear lower part of the panel decoration 1000 in such a manner that the game panel 2000 and the back unit 3000 are sandwiched between them. It is configured with a substrate holder 1200 that is mounted. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 2000 within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 4100 (see FIG. 130) attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 to control the progress of the game, and a main control unit 1300 (main control board). 4100), which displays the game status based on the control signal from the panel decoration 1000 and is attached to the lower left corner of the panel decoration 1000 so as to be visible to the player side; Peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 4140) that controls the performance based on control signals from unit 1300 (main control board 4100), and furthermore, it is attached to the front side of the back part of the back unit 3000 and is attached to the front side of the game. Also provided is a liquid crystal display device 3600 arranged in the center of the area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 4140).

However, as will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are provided with a structure that can move up and down. Along with this, the rear unit 3000 also has a special arrangement for securing a performance space in which the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be moved, a space for arranging a driving unit that applies a driving force to the liquid crystal display device 3600, and the like. It is provided with a structure. In this embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is longer in the vertical direction and narrower in width than the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 .

In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment, a specific effect image can be displayed so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, thereby realizing a large display effect. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect in cooperation with the two display units.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the game board 5 includes a panel decoration 1000 defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a plate-like game panel 2000 attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000, and a game panel. A rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the 2000. The game panel 2000 has a starting opening unit 2200 having a first starting opening 2002, a first big winning opening, etc., and a center accessory 2500 attached to the front. The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 and a liquid crystal drive unit 3400 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 . The back box 3010 has a box shape, and the front side accessory unit 3200 (face drive unit 3210, shoulder drive unit 3220, full burst drive unit (lower accessory) 3230, right guideway 3250) is attached to the rear wall. be done. In addition, the decoration unit 3100 (back decoration upper unit 3110, back decoration left unit 3120, back decoration lower unit 3130) is attached so as to overlap the front side of the front accessory unit 3200, and the front accessory is positioned at the standby position. Each unit 3200 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

A liquid crystal housing portion 3480 of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 has a box shape and houses an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620 . A liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is attached to the front between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 . When the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the front surfaces of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the rear end of the back box 3010 are close to each other. A stepped portion 3315 is provided on the rear wall of the back box 3010 so that the rear box 3010 does not interfere with the rear box 3010 . The stepped portion 3315 is provided according to the movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 . A main control unit 1300 , a peripheral control unit 1500 , and a rear decoration unit 3700 are attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal driving unit 3400 .

In this regard, the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment is provided with a structure capable of meeting such demands, as described above. For example, the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 so as to avoid overlapping with the production space created when it is moved when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to make maximum use of the effect space created when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are moved in the depth direction. It becomes possible to dispose the drive unit 3700 . As shown in FIG. 84(b), a body drive section 3700 is attached to protrude rearward from the rearmost end of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the thickness of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided in front of it are reduced. By having the movable decorative portion 3710 that is thicker than that, it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of realism.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the thick portion of the movable decorative portion 3710 having such a thickness is configured to be realized as a movable effect facing the player side. Therefore, even if the performance space opened by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is made relatively small, after passing through this performance space, the thick part is made to face the player side. As a result, it is possible to provide a movable effect that is larger than the area of the effect space when viewed from the front.

[5-1. panel decoration]
Next, the panel decoration 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG.

The panel decoration 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The panel decoration 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the circumferential direction clockwise along the circumferential direction, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extending obliquely to the upper right. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the panel decoration 1000 substantially along the line 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left corner when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view of the game area 5a. and an out-guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the panel decoration 1000 extends from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the panel decoration 1000, and the upper part of the right rail is curved inwardly of the panel decoration 1000. 1005, and an impinging portion 1006 connecting the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and against which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

In addition, the panel decoration 1000 is rotatably pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the outer rail 1001 and the closed position and the clockwise rotation when viewed from the front. The backflow prevention member 1007 is rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the direction of , and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. is provided.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 2000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel 2000. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the panel plate 2100, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the panel plate 2100 taken along line AA, and (c) is a rear view of the panel plate 2100. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the center role 2500, (b) is a sectional view of the center role 2500 taken along line AA, and (c) is a rear view of the center role 2500. FIG. FIG. 89(a) is a front view of the game panel 2000, (b) is an enlarged view near the guidance exit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA near the guidance exit.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game panel 2000 includes a flat plate-like panel plate 2100 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-like panel decoration 1000 and which is transparent, and a center panel in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. , and a frame-like center accessory 2500 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In addition, the starting port unit 2200 and the center accessory 2500 are attached to the panel plate 2100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 2100, and the rear end penetrates the opening 2112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 2100 .

In addition, the game panel 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions in 5a, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls, and a game ball. A second start port 2004 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing through the gate part 2003, and acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 A first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided in which the game balls can be accepted either according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the lottery.

Here, the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged near the bottom left in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, or near the bottom right when viewed from the front within the game area 5a. Among these, the general prize winning opening 2001 arranged near the lower left in the front view in the game area 5a is provided with two openings capable of receiving a plurality of game balls at the same time. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right center in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. A second starting port 2004 is arranged between the abutment portion 1006 and the gate portion 2003 . The first big prize winning opening 2005 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 2002 when viewed from the front. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the bottom right in the front view in the game area 5 a is arranged directly above the first big winning opening 2005 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged directly below the gate section 2003 .

[5-2a. panel plate]
Next, the panel board 2100 of the game panel 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG.

The panel plate 2100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 2100 has a plurality of openings 2112 penetrating therethrough in the front and rear direction for mounting the starting port unit 2200, the center accessory 2500, and the like. Further, a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the starting port unit 2200, the center accessory 2500, and the back unit 3000, and positioning holes are formed.

When the game panel 2000 is attached to the rear side of the panel decoration 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 2100 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the panel decoration 1000. - 特許庁As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide section 1003, passes through the out port 1111, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 2000.

That is, as is well known, the panel plate 2100 is the game area 5a as a flow path through which game balls flow down when the starter unit 2200, the center accessory 2500, and the panel decoration 1000 are attached. It is a part that is provided for the purpose of creating a form that is compartmentalized. However, as will be described later, in the upper part of the panel plate 2100 of the present embodiment, a flow path through which game balls can pass is not formed, contrary to the above purpose, and the panel decoration 1000 is not formed. It has a structure in which a thin "overlap portion 2113" smaller than the diameter of a game ball is only defined by the outer rail 1001 in the attached state.

As will be described later, the marginal portion 2113 has a thinner plate thickness than the other regions, and is a portion that is provided with a hollow shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of mounting holes 2113a are formed. Also, as will be described later, the marginal portion 2113 is formed from a position facing the exit of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) to a position facing the impinging portion 1006. It can contribute to the stabilization of the flow in the high-speed flow section until the game ball hit with force from the rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) collides with the above-mentioned impingement part 1006 and loses its momentum. ing.

In addition, such mounting holes 2113a are also formed in other regions of the panel plate 2100 different from the above-mentioned marginal portion 2113, and front ornaments such as the center accessories 2500 are also mounted in this region with screws or the like. It is possible.

[5-2b. starting unit]
Next, starting port unit 2200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The starting port unit 2200 is provided from below the left center in the front view in the game area 5a to the out port 1111 and further to the lower right portion, and is attached to the panel plate 2100 from the front. The starting opening unit 2200 has a warp opening 2220 , a general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a first big winning opening 2005 and a V winning unit 2210 .

The warp inlet 2220 is formed at the upper left end of the starting port unit 2200 so as to protrude from the front surface, and is capable of receiving game balls from above the game area. A game ball received in the warp entrance 2220 is guided to the back side of the game board 5, passes through the warp hole 2123 formed in the panel plate 2100, and enters the warp passage 2521 arranged on the back side of the panel plate 2100. It is guided and flows down onto the stage 2530 formed in the center accessory 2500 . Warp related will be described later.

The general winning openings 2001 are arranged to protrude from the front surface to the lower left and lower right of the starting opening unit 2200 . A shelf 2203 is formed between the warp entrance 2220 and the general winning opening 2001 arranged at the lower left, protruding forward and extending laterally so that the right end side in front view is lower. The left end of the shelf 2203 is substantially in contact with the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 can be guided to the right by the shelf 2203 (center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a). . The general prize winning opening 2001 arranged on the lower left side opens toward the upper left side in a front view, and is configured, for example, to easily receive a game ball that has flowed down onto the shelf 2203 . In addition, the general winning opening 2001 arranged on the lower right side is arranged directly above the first big winning opening 2005 and is open upward, and can receive the game ball flowing down the right hitting game area 2540 of the game area 5a. It has become.

The first starting port 2002 is arranged so as to protrude from the front surface directly above the out port 1111, and the receiving port is open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. In addition, since the decorative plate 2205 is arranged in front of the first starting port 2002, the player cannot visually recognize the entry of the game ball when viewed from the front. After being detected by the starting port switch 3022 (first starting port switch), the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 passes through the starting port passage hole 2122 formed in the panel plate 2100 and guided to the back side. be done.

The first big prize winning opening 2005 is arranged directly under the general winning opening 2001 and to the upper right of the first starting opening 2002 so as to protrude from the front surface. The first big prize winning port 2005 has its upper side rotatably supported by the starting port unit 2200, and in the normal game state (the first attacker solenoid is de-energized), it faces the player perpendicularly to the game board 5. A plate-shaped first big prize winning port door member is provided so as to close the receiving port of the first big prize winning port 2005 in a projecting state. When the jackpot game state is entered, the lower side of the first jackpot door member rotates backward and downward when the first attacker solenoid is energized, so that the game ball can be received. The game balls that have won the first big prize opening 2005 are counted by the count switch 2110 and guided to the back side through the guide path provided inside the starting opening unit 2200 .

A V winning opening 2021 is arranged at the right end of the starting opening unit 2200, and when a game ball wins, a predetermined lottery is carried out. A game ball that has won a prize in the V winning opening 2021 passes through a guide path provided inside the starting opening unit 2200 and is guided to the back side.

[5-2c. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the game panel 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 90(a) is a front view of the center accessory 2500, (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA, and (c) is a rear view of the center accessory 2500. FIG. Also, FIG. 90(a) is a front view of the center accessory 2500 attached to the panel plate 2100, and (b) is a diagram explaining the attachment portion of the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100 near the exit of the guide rail. , (c) is a cross-sectional view of an attachment portion between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100. FIG.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2200 in the game area 5a and near the upper center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 2100 of the game panel 2000 . The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the liquid crystal display device 3600 arranged behind the game panel 2000 and the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. . The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 and a second prize winning opening 2006 .

The center accessory 2500 has a flat frame-shaped flange portion 2511 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 2100 along the periphery of an opening 2112 that largely penetrates the panel plate 2100 in the front-rear direction. A frame-shaped frame having a front peripheral wall portion 2512 that protrudes to prevent game balls from entering the frame, and a rear peripheral wall portion 2513 that protrudes rearward from the flange portion 2511 and is inserted into the opening portion 2112. A center base 2510 is provided. The front peripheral wall portion 2512 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the flange portion 2511 except for a portion of the lower side. In addition, the front peripheral wall portion 2512 is highest at a position slightly leftward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a stage 2530 extending left and right along the lower side within the frame of the central portion of the center base 2510 in the left-right direction. A game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2220 provided in the starting entrance unit 2200 flows through the warp passage 3050 (see FIGS. 94, 95, etc.) provided on the back side of the panel plate 2100, It is emitted onto stage 2530 from warp exit 2522 . In the stage 2530, the game ball released from the warp exit 2522 rolls in the horizontal direction on the stage 2530 and is then released into the game area 5a.

In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, a game ball enters the warp entrance 2220 in the game area 5a, passes through the warp path 2521, the warp exit 2522, and the guide path 2523, and is supplied to the stage 2530 near the center of the stage 2530. , and is returned (recirculated) into the game area 5a. In addition, in the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the stage 2530 has the first start opening 2002 located directly below the central portion. It is received in the first starting port 2002 .

However, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 90, the flange portion 2511 provided on the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 according to this embodiment is formed in accordance with the shape of the marginal portion 2113 of the panel plate 2100. When the panel plate 2100 faces the panel plate 2100 in such a manner that it is fitted in the marginal portion 2113, the recessed shape of the marginal portion 2113 is filled with the thickness of the flange portion 2511, and the height of the panel plate 2100 is substantially the same as that of the other regions of the panel plate 2100. It is set up with a structure that creates a sense of ambience.

That is, in the center accessory 2500 according to this embodiment, when the flange portion 2511 provided on the upper portion thereof is positioned so as to face the hollow shape of the overlap portion 2113 of the panel plate 2100 so as to fill it, By screwing into the plurality of mounting holes 2113a in the marginal portion 2113, it can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 2100, and the narrow marginal portion 2113 side as described above can be formed. The flow path for the game balls that cannot be obtained is formed on the side of the flange portion 2511 (center accessory 2500). In this way, the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 can be greatly cut away, so that the depth space of the game machine can be extended upward.

Also, in such a configuration, the upper flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 extends from the frame portion to a position facing (approaching) the outer rail 1001 of the panel decoration 1000. , the flange portion 2511 does not create a step with other regions of the panel plate 2100 .

The flow path of the game ball formed on the upper flange portion 2511 side of the center accessory 2500 is matched with the shape of the above-mentioned marginal portion 2113, and the outlet of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). , to a position facing the blocking portion 1006 . Therefore, in the center accessory 2500 according to this embodiment, the flow path of the game ball formed on the flange portion 2511 side of the upper part has a game ball from the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). to the game area 5a on the left side of the center role 2500, and the right side guide to guide the game ball to the game area 5a (right hitting game area 2540) on the right side of the center role 2500. A passageway 2590 is formed.

Of these, the right guiding passage 2590 has only a width (flange width) that allows one game ball to roll, while the left guiding passage 2580 has the right guiding passage 2590 and A portion where the game ball can roll at approximately the same position and a portion where the game ball can roll below the right guide passage 2590 are provided. That is, in the left guide path 2580, there is a possibility that the game ball rolling at approximately the same position as the right guide path 2590 rolls to the right guide path 2590 as it is. The game ball that rolls on the lower side has no possibility of rolling to the right guide passage 2590 and is guided to the game area 5 a on the left side of the center accessory 2500 .

In addition, of the left guide passage 2580, the portion where the game ball can roll below the right guide passage 2590 is formed integrally with the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with resin and has a convex shape. A plurality of obstacle structures 2581 are provided, and a game ball passes through one of a plurality of flow paths formed between these obstacle structures 2581 (troughs) to the left side of the center role 2500. It is adapted to be guided to the area 5a. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to use obstacle nails when forming a plurality of flow paths in the left guide passage 2580, so that the thickness of the flange portion 2511 can be made thin. become.

It should be noted that whether or not the game ball rolls on the lower side than the right guide path 2590 in the left guide path 2580, and whether or not the plurality of flow paths formed between the plurality of obstacle structures 2581 Which side the game ball rolls on is determined by the size of the firing intensity according to the rotation angle when the handle lever 504 is rotated, and the game ball is hit according to the skill of the player. division is possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 90, the right guide passage 2590 of the center accessory 2500 is formed from a portion communicating with the left guide passage 2580 to a position facing the blocking portion 1006. It is a part that guides and supplies game balls from the left guide passage 2580 to a right hitting game area 2540 (game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2500) formed on the side.

However, in the right guide passage 2590 according to this embodiment, in adopting a structure in which screws are attached to the panel plate 2100 below the impact portion 1006, the panel By providing a step between the plate 2100 and other areas, the ball speed suppressed by the impact part 1006 is further suppressed, and the right hitting game area 2540 (the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2500) In order to improve the stability of the game.

Due to the structure of the right guide passage 2590, the marginal portion 2113 (depression shape) of the panel plate 2100 is mounted below the impact portion 1006 as shown in FIGS. The hole 2113a is not provided, and the mounting hole 2113a is purposely provided in a region of the panel plate 2100 other than the depression.

That is, the right hitting game area 2540 (the game area 5a on the right side of the center accessory 2500) is an area mainly used in the game when the so-called time saving function is operating, and in such a game state, It is often required to progress the game stably and at high speed. In this regard, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game ball whose rolling speed is suppressed not only by the impingement part 1006 but also by the step below it flows down the right-handed game area 2540. As a result, the acceptance probability to various acceptance ports in the right-handed game area 2540 is less likely to vary, and the stability of the game in the game state in which the time saving function is operating can be improved. become.

Here, the right hitting game area 2540 is defined by the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, the right rail 1005 of the panel decoration 1000, and the like, and is positioned vertically as the game area 5a on the right side of the center role 2500. And, it has a space of a predetermined width whose dimension in the left-right direction is sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The right-handed game area 2540 is an area from below the impingement part 1006 of the panel decoration 1000 to the vicinity of the second big prize opening 2006, and in addition to various reception openings, the flowing direction of game balls such as obstacle nails. A member that affects the

In the right hitting game area 2540, a second starting opening 2004, a gate section 2003 and a second big winning opening 2006 are arranged as various reception openings. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the upper right circulation space 2541 . A gate portion 2003 is arranged below the second starting port 2004 . A second prize winning opening 2006 is arranged below the gate portion 2003 .

The gate part 2003 is provided slightly to the right below the second starting port 2004 and slightly below the middle stage of the decorative member 2545 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange part 2511, and only one game ball is provided. It is formed so as to be able to pass through in the vertical direction. A gate switch 2352 for detecting passage of a game ball is attached to the gate portion 2003 .

The second starting port 2004 is formed directly below the blocking portion 1006 of the panel decoration 1000 so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the flange portion 2511 and open upward. Also, the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the starting port switch 3022 (second starting port switch), guided to the back side of the game board 5, and discharged.

By the way, in recent years, in the gaming machine field, the complexity and size of gaming machine components (accessories, ball passages, etc.) have been increasing, and we are developing a gaming machine that allows for a higher degree of design freedom. is required. As described above, since the panel plate 2100 is thicker than the center accessory 2500, the space in the pachinko machine 1 in the depth direction becomes narrower as the game area 5a formed by the panel plate 2100 increases. As a result, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom in arranging game machine components will be reduced.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, both the left side guide passage 2580 and the right side guide passage 2590 are integrally formed of resin on the center accessory 2500 side. This eliminates the need to provide a ball passage in the upper part of the panel plate 2100 side (there is a need to secure an area on the panel plate 2100 side extending from the outer rail 1001 to a length equal to or larger than the diameter of the ball when the panel ornament 1000 is attached). Therefore, the panel plate 2100 of this embodiment does not have a flow path through which the game ball passes. In the first place, since the marginal portion 2113 is provided as a hollow shape with respect to other regions, it cannot function as a flow path through which the game ball passes. Since the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 can be made thinner than the panel plate 2100, the thickness of the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced by that amount. 1006), and the depth space on the upper side of the game board can be suitably secured. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is possible to displace the movable area of the character and the movable area of the liquid crystal above the game board 5 in the depth direction. .

More specifically, the upper flange portion of the center accessory is attached so as to cover the overlap portion 2113 formed on the panel plate 2100 . At this time, as shown in FIG. 88( a ), the marginal portion 2113 has a narrow shape that can be screwed to attach the center accessory 2500 . It should be noted that the marginal portion 2113 itself does not necessarily have to exist in the region other than the portion to be fastened with screws.

The flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 attached to the marginal portion 2113 formed on the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 forms a gap between the left guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2590 together with the outer rail 1001 and the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. form both. At this time, the game ball passing through the left guide path 2580 and the right guide path 2590 is configured not to directly contact the panel plate 2100 including the marginal portion 2113 .

As described above, the overlap portion 2113 is formed thinner than the other portions of the panel plate 2100, and as shown in FIG. The thickness is approximately the same as that of other portions of the panel plate 2100 in the folded state. Therefore, when the game ball released from the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) moves from the game panel 2000 to the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory, the rolling becomes unstable due to a step or the like. Inviting a situation such as colliding with the glass can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the ball entry rate of the game ball into the starting hole or the like is low during the game, the player checks the frequency of checking the discharge condition (speed etc.) of the game ball from the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). is known to increase. However, at the timing of checking the discharge condition of the game ball from the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002), a hot effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 3600, and a movable accessory is started in front of the center accessory 2500. There are many cases where an effect is started or a button effect is provided.

In particular, when a joint between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100 is provided at a position facing the exit (guidance exit) of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002), this joint is Since the game ball from the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) immediately comes into contact (the path of the whole ball), the joint (the joint between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100) rattles every time it is shot. Furthermore, there is a concern that the frequency of confirmation of the guide exit by the player will increase due to the deterioration of the ball entry rate of the game ball.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the panel plate 2100 is provided with a depression shape (overlap portion 2113) at a position facing the exit (guidance exit) of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). After forming, the mounting holes 2113a are provided in the opposing depressed portions. Then, the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is attached so as to fill the depression shape (overlap portion 2113), and the flow path of the game ball is formed on the flange portion 2511 side. By suppressing the occurrence of a step at the joint (the joint between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100) and by screwing it at this position, the joint ( The joint between the center accessory 2500 and the panel plate 2100) is less likely to rattle (unstable rolling of the game ball), so the game ball is released from the guide rails (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). It becomes possible to suppress the frequency of checking the condition, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the loss of the performance opportunity.

In addition, by forming the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 to a position facing the exit (guiding exit) of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), the depth space on the back side is reduced. It can be extended to nearby areas. As a result, the space for performance can be expanded up to the upper side of the pachinko machine, and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed through the design and structure of the game machine with a higher degree of freedom.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the positions where the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 faces the exits of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are as shown in FIG. In addition, it is on the left side of the left end of the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600 from the front. According to such a configuration, the screwed portion between the panel plate 2100 and the flange portion 2511 (the portion where the performance space cannot be created on the back side of the panel plate 2100) is driven to the left of the left end of the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600. be able to As a result, it is possible to secure substantially the entire upper side of the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600 as a space for arranging accessories, lamps, etc., and effects in cooperation with the visible region of the liquid crystal display device 3600 near the guidance exit. By making it easier to design such as, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the loss of performance opportunities.

Especially, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. As described above, when the panel decoration 1000 is attached, the thin "overlap portion 2113" smaller than the diameter of the game ball is only defined by the outer rail 1001.

In this way, the upper part of the panel plate 2100 is formed as a thin "overlap portion 2113" that is less than the diameter of a game ball, and a thin flange portion 2511 (center accessory 2500) placed on the front side By forming the game ball flow path, the depth space (performance space) on the back side of the panel plate 2100 can be extended to the back side of the game ball flow path on the top.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. and a movable region of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and are provided so as to overlap with them in a front view. In this way, two different decorative movable parts (here, the decorative member provided to be able to emit light and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) are arranged in the depth direction on the back side of the area corresponding to one upper sphere in the left guide passage 2580. The reason why it is possible to secure enough space for overlapping arrangement is that the upper part of the panel board 2100 is formed as a thin "overlap part 2113" that is less than the diameter of the game ball. It is clear that

As described above, by forming the flange portion of the decorative accessory up to the position facing the guide exit, the depth space on the back side can be expanded to the vicinity thereof as much as possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to dispose accessories, lamps, etc. used for the performance in this space, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to miss the performance opportunity when checking the area around the guidance exit.

In other words, the player has an opportunity to watch the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail in order to adjust the shooting of the game ball during the game, and in such a state, it is easy for the player to overlook the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 3600. Become. In this respect, in the above configuration, the opening 2112 is expanded to the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail, and a decorative member that can perform light emission effects in cooperation with the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be arranged in that space. It is possible to prevent overlooking the performance performed by the liquid crystal display device 3600 while confirming how the game balls are released near the exit of the guide rail.

For example, the decorative member provided on the back side of the position facing the guide exit (the exit of the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002)) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3600 in a specific display effect (operating the top plate effect button 257, etc.) , etc.) appears, the user can enjoy the performance without losing the opportunity to operate the top tray performance button 257 or the like while confirming the vicinity of the exit of the guide rail.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , and a mounting hole 2113a is provided at a thick portion. It is desirable to provide this thick portion at the center of the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 . That is, considering that the opening is formed in an arc shape, the center of the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 is located above the other regions of the upper portion of the panel. In view of the arrangement of the rectangular effect body (liquid crystal display device), even if the portion protruding from the panel decoration 1000 (outer rail 1001) on the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 is made thicker than the other regions, This is because it is difficult to press the depth space for arranging the effect body. It should be noted that the thick portion may be formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The panel plate 2100 may be a plate member instead of transparent resin.

According to this embodiment, as described above, the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) guide the game ball guided to the game area 5a rolls the upstream guide passage 2580 and the right guide passage 2580 Both guiding passages 2590 and 2590 are integrally formed with the flange portion 2511 on the upper part of the center accessory 2500 . In other words, the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 has the function of attaching it to the panel plate 2100 and the function of the guide passage between the left guide passage 2580 that guides the game ball to the left game area and the right guide passage 2590 that guides the game ball to the right game area. configured to have Conventionally, it was necessary to secure both the area for the passage of game balls and the area for installing the flange portion 2511 for mounting the center accessory 2500 on the upper part of the panel plate 2100. In this case, since there is no need to secure a flow path through which game balls pass in the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 side, the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 can be configured to be as close to the outer rail as possible. The opening 2112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 provided in 2100 can be formed large. As a result, the space within the opening 2112 can be sufficiently secured and utilized, and the structure to be arranged and driven within the opening 2112 can be increased in size and complexity.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the marginal portion 2113, which is the region on the side of the panel plate 2100 where the flange portion 2511 is installed, is formed in a thin shape less than the diameter of the game ball. . In other words, the opening 2112 of the panel plate 2100 is enlarged to a position overlapping with the attached flange portion 2511 . Since the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is thinner than the panel plate 2100 , the back space of the flange portion 2511 can expand the space in the depth direction more than the back space of the panel plate 2100 . In other words, the range of the guide path by the flange portion 2511 on the upper side of the game board (the entire area from the left (position facing the exit of the guide rail) to the right (position facing the impingement portion 1006) of the upper portion of the panel plate 2100) It is possible to expand the space in the depth direction.

In order to enlarge the opening 2112 of the panel plate 2100, as shown in FIG. 84(a), a center accessory 2500 is placed at a position facing the exit of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) on the upper part of the panel plate 2100. The configuration is such that the flange portion 2511 is attached. However, when the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is attached to the position facing the exit of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), the thickness of the flange portion 2511 causes a step at the junction with the panel plate 2100. , the game ball guided vigorously from the guide rail (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) comes into contact with the step, changing the shooting direction, and depending on the changed direction, the glass covering the front of the game area A game ball collides and breaks the glass.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the upper portion of the panel plate 2100 has a panel plate extending from a position facing the exit of the guide rails (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) to a position facing the blocking portion 1006. A depression-shaped overlap portion 2113 having a thinner plate thickness than the other regions of 2100 is formed. 2511 is attached in such a way as to cover it. Since the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is formed to have the same thickness as the hollow-shaped recess of the overlap portion 2113, when attached to the overlap portion 2113, there is a difference in level between the flange portion 2511 and the other regions of the panel plate 2100. It is possible to construct a flat surface without creating a Therefore, the flange portion 2511 can be attached to a position facing the exit of the guide rail (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002), and the panel opening 2112 can be expanded (enlarged the performance space) while the guide rail ( It is possible to reliably guide the shooting direction of the game ball guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) along the guiding path.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the panel plate 2100 has a thin marginal portion 2113 less than the diameter of the game ball and a wide marginal portion 2113 larger than the diameter of the game ball. are provided in part. Mounting holes 2113 a for assembling the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with screws or the like are formed in the wide marginal portion 2113 . The mounting of the flange portion 2511 of the center accessory 2500 by means of a screw can ensure strength by being performed on the wide marginal portion 2113 .

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 2000 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 2000 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit and the back unit 3000 of the game panel 2000 can be received. It can be discharged downward from a discharge portion formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 accommodates a payout control board 4110 for controlling game content, payout of game balls, etc., a main control board 4100, and a power supply board for generating and supplying control power to these boards. and a main control board box 1320 attached to the board holder 1200 .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 4100 is enhanced.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 82 and 84. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the panel decoration 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 4100 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. A normal pattern display device for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the normal lottery after the normal pattern is variably displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal pattern related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established, and acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 (start winning Based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by generation), the eight LEDs are controlled to blink based on the result of the first special lottery, so that the eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery after the first special symbol is variably displayed. The holding number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the first special symbol display device. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs to be displayed and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the second start port 2004 (occurrence of start winning prize) A second special symbol indicator for displaying the eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after the second special symbol is variably displayed by controlling, and acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. A second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the pending number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbols related to the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing patterns of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006. and are mainly provided.

The function display unit 1400 can display the pending number, patterns, etc. by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc., of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 86. FIG. A peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 4140 (see FIG. 131) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 4100, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 4140. box 1520; The peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and a liquid crystal display control part 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 128). ).

[5-7. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 3600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81, 82, 84 and 85. FIG. The liquid crystal display device 3600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5 a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 2000 . More specifically, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear unit 3000 at substantially the center thereof. With the game board 5 assembled, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 . The liquid crystal display device 3600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The liquid crystal display device 3600 of this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620, each of which is configured to be vertically movable. When each liquid crystal display device is in the reference position (a state in which the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are positioned at the bottom), between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, A liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is arranged, and can move up and down independently of the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 or interlocked with one of the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 . The upper liquid crystal display device 3610, the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 are attached to a liquid crystal drive unit 3400 having an actuator (motor) for driving each of them. Liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is included in rear unit 3000 . Operation modes of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 will be described later.

[5-8. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. FIG. FIG. 91(a) is a view of the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 91(b) is a view of the back unit viewed from the back. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 2000, and as shown in FIGS. Equipped with a front-side accessory unit 3200 that includes accessories that make up the head, arms, legs, etc. during the movable performance by the object unit 3700 (body drive unit), a liquid crystal display device 3600, its drive mechanism (transmission mechanism), etc. and a rear accessory unit 3300.

Also, as will be described later, in the back part of the back unit 3000 according to this embodiment (the back part of the back accessory unit 3300), in addition to the control units such as the main control board box 1320 and the peripheral control board box 1520, A rear end decoration unit 3700 having an accessory movable forward from between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 by moving at least one of the liquid crystal display device 3610 or the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. (fuselage drive unit) is attached to the rear side.

[5-8a. Back cover unit]
Next, the lining unit 3100 of the lining unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the lining unit 3100, in which (a) is the upper lining unit 3110, (b) is the left lining unit 3120, and (c) is the lower lining unit 3130. FIG.

The back decoration unit 3100 is a decoration member arranged behind the panel board 2100 of the game panel 2000 and behind the center accessory 2500, and includes a back decoration upper unit 3110, a back decoration left unit 3120, and a back decoration lower unit 3130. and In addition, the back decoration unit 3100 can be visually recognized through the panel plate 2100 formed with transparency, and at least a part of the movable accessory provided in the front side accessory unit 3200 can be viewed by the player when not in operation. It is provided so as to make it difficult to see from the

Here, the back decoration upper unit 3110 is arranged so as to cover the upper side of the opening. Also, the back decoration left unit 3120 is arranged from the central portion on the left side of the opening to the upper side. The back decoration lower unit 3130 is arranged so as to cover the entire lower side from the central portion on the left side of the opening.

A warp path 3150 is formed in the back cover lower unit 3130 as shown in FIGS. FIG. 95 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the warp passage of the rear unit. The warp passage 3150 is a flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed through the warp entrance 2220 of the starter unit 2200 to the stage 2530 provided in the center accessory 2500 . In this way, by forming a game ball through the back side of the panel board 2100 instead of forming the warp passage in the center accessory 2500, the degree of freedom in arranging the warp passage 3150 can be increased. That is, it is possible to arrange the warp entrance regardless of the shape of the center accessory 2500 .

[5-8b. Front accessory unit]
Next, the front side accessory unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail while also referring to FIG. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the front accessory unit 3200, in which (a) is the face drive section 3210, the full burst drive section (lower accessory) 3230, (b) the shoulder drive section 3220, (c) ) is a full burst drive unit (lower accessory) 3230, and (d) is a right guideway 3250. FIG.

The front accessory unit 3200 is attached to the rear of the back decoration unit 3100, and includes a face drive section 3210, a shoulder drive section 3220, a full burst drive section (lower accessory) 3230, and a right guideway 3250. there is

Here, the face driving section 3210 is composed of a left face part 3210a and a right face part 3210b as movable parts, and further includes a driving mechanism including an actuator for driving these movable parts. These movable accessories and drive mechanisms are arranged on the back side of the back decoration upper unit 3110 in a state where a specific movable effect is not executed (during non-operation), and are difficult to see from the player side. On the other hand, in the state (at the time of operation) in which a specific movable effect is executed, the face of the robot first moves downward and then moves toward the center on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. It is set up to form a The details of the rendering by face driving section 3210 will be described later.

The shoulder driving section 3220 is composed of a left arm section 3220a and a right arm section 3220b, and further has a driving mechanism including an actuator for driving these movable accessories. The shoulder drive section 3220 is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, similarly to the face drive section 3210, in a state in which the movable effect is not being executed. Specifically, the left arm portion 3220 a is arranged on the back side of the back decoration left unit 3120 , and the right arm portion 3220 b is arranged on the back side of the decorative member 2545 provided on the center accessory 2500 . When the effect is executed, the left arm portion 3220a and the right arm portion 3220b move toward the center, and the effect is executed as if they were united with the rear end decoration unit 3700 (trunk driving portion) described later.

The full-burst driving section 3230 has a rendering condition different from the rendering condition under which a specific movable rendering is performed by each driving section (face driving section 3210, shoulder driving section 3220, rear end decoration unit 3700 (body driving section)). is satisfied, it alone moves to the front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to produce an effect, and a drive mechanism including an actuator for driving the lower role.

However, of the drive mechanism of the full burst drive section 3230, the right rail section 3240 of the rail section that allows the lower accessory to slide up and down is provided as a separate body from the full burst drive section 3230. The right guiding path 3250 is provided so as to be integrally formed with the right rail portion 3240 provided separately. Further, as will be described later, the right rail portion 3240 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member 2545 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the right guideway 3250 is connected to the rear accessory unit 3300, which will be described later. After opposing the back box 3310 constituting the back box 3310 and providing a discharge passage between them, by communicating with the receiving port (for example, starting port etc.) in the right hitting game area 2540, the game ball received in the receiving port can be discharged from the game area 5a.

[5-8c. Rear accessory unit]
Next, the back side accessory unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 together. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the rear accessory unit 3300 disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the rear accessory unit 3300 disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view.

The rear accessory unit 3300 is attached to the rear of the front accessory unit 3200 and includes, in order from the front side, a back box 3310, a liquid crystal drive unit 3400, and a rear decoration unit 3700 (body drive section). there is

[5-8c-1. back box]
First, the back box 3310 of the rear accessory unit 3300 will be described in detail while also referring to FIG. FIG. 99(a) is a view of the back box 3310 viewed from the front, and FIG. 99(b) is a view of the back.

The back box 3310 has a box shape with an open front, and a square opening 3311 penetrating through a rear standing wall 3312 is formed. The opening 3311 is formed to have approximately the same size (or slightly smaller size) than the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 3600 . As described above, the liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided with the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 that can move up and down on the front side. A step portion 3315 is also formed. That is, in this case, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can move in the space secured by the stepped portion 3315, while the rear standing wall 3312 is positioned along the periphery (lateral side) of the liquid crystal display device 3600. It is possible to dispose the liquid crystal display device 3600 so as to be close to a drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) including an actuator for driving the liquid crystal display device 3600 .

That is, although the above-described front accessory unit 3200 is arranged on the back side of the back decoration unit 3100, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Existence can be easily grasped. In this respect, the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is close to the rear standing wall 3312 to such an extent that a stepped portion 3315 corresponding to the movable range of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is formed. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided there even if you look into it from the side. As a result, at least when the liquid crystal display device 3600 is not driven, various members, including the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600, provided on the rear side of the rear erected wall 3312 are arranged. (Rear end decoration unit 3700 (trunk drive unit), etc.) can be kept secret from the player side.

Moreover, the rear erected wall 3312 according to this embodiment serves as a back box concealment section for concealing the existence of the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive section). In addition to functioning, the front side accessory unit 3200 having a plurality of movable bodies (driving parts) is provided with a mounting portion (mounting hole, etc.) to support the front accessory unit 3200. It also functions as According to such a configuration, the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) provided on the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is prevented from being visually recognized without wasting the space in the depth direction.

As a result, the drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear end decoration unit 3700 (trunk drive unit) can be viewed from the front in spite of the lack of installation space in the depth direction. It is possible to properly dispose those which should be visually recognized in the front view and those which should not be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

The face driving section 3210 of the front accessory unit 3200 is attached to a portion of the rear standing wall 3312 which is above the opening 3011 in a front view. In addition, a shoulder drive unit 3220 including a left arm and a right arm is attached to the center of the opening 3011 from the upper left end of the opening 3011 in the front view and from the upper right end to the center of the rear standing wall 3312 . A full-burst drive unit 3230 is attached to the rear standing wall 3312 along the lower end and the lower side from the left center of the opening 3011 in the front view.

Furthermore, in the back box 3310 according to this embodiment, a discharge passage is formed between the right rail portion 3240 (right guide path 3250) and the front end near the front end of the bottom right corner in the rear standing wall 3312 when viewed from the front. (The part that forms the passage that guides the game ball received in the receiving port (eg, starting port, etc.) in the right hitting game area 2540 downward and guides it to the right ball passage unit 3316 and further to the collection gutter) is provided. However, this discharge passage is also formed by using at least part of the space secured between the front accessory unit 3200 by the stepped portion 3315, and wastefully uses the space in the depth direction. It's not like

FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the mounting position of the right guideway 3250 on the back box 3310. FIG. FIG. 101 is a see-through perspective view showing the shape of the right guiding path 3250. FIG. As shown in FIG. 101, a rib portion 3251 is formed inside the right guideway 3250 as shown in FIG. It's like

[5-8c-2. LCD drive unit]
Next, the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97, 98 and 102 to 110. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400. FIG. FIG. 103(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position, and FIG. 103(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA. FIG. 104(a) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position, and FIG. 104(b) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit without the liquid crystal decoration member. FIG. 105(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top, and FIG. 105(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA. FIG. 106(a) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top, and FIG. 106(b) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal drive unit without the liquid crystal decorative member. FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal driving mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position, and FIG. 107(b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA. FIG. 108(a) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal driving mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the lowest position. FIG. 109(a) is a front view of the liquid crystal drive mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top, and FIG. 109(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA. FIG. 110(a) is a perspective view of the liquid crystal driving mechanism when the upper liquid crystal display device is positioned at the top.

As described above, the liquid crystal display device 3600 in this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620, each of which can move vertically independently. Further, the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 accommodates the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and includes a drive mechanism (transmission mechanism) including an actuator for moving each liquid crystal display device.

Further, as described above, in a normal state in which an effect involving movement of the liquid crystal display device is not executed, a horizontally elongated rectangular liquid crystal decoration member is provided between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. 3630 are arranged, and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 can move up and down independently or in conjunction with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 . As shown in FIG. 104, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 can hide the gap and the frame portion between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 .

The liquid crystal drive unit 3400 holds the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 moves the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down under the control of the peripheral control board 4140, and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. , and a lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 that enables the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 to move the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 up and down under the control of the peripheral control board 4140, an upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 and and a liquid crystal housing portion 3480 that houses the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 . In the liquid crystal housing portion 3480, between the upper liquid crystal housing portion 3480a housing the upper liquid crystal driving unit 3410 and the lower liquid crystal housing portion 3480b housing the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440, a rear end decoration unit 3700 (body driving portion) is provided. An opening 3480c is formed through which the front decoration 3700a can be seen.

The upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410, as its drive mechanism, urges the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 that supports the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 with a large self-weight upward in the assembled state of the game board 5. An urging member 3412 for assisting upward movement of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a mechanism for vertically moving the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 by means of an upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 are provided.

In the upper liquid crystal driving unit 3410, guide rods 3413 having a length slightly shorter than the height of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 are arranged vertically on both sides of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. FIG. The guide rod 3413 is inserted into bearing portions 3414 formed at two upper and lower positions on both the left and right sides of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 .

As will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, at both ends of the lower side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411, a plate member 3450 provided in a lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440, which is a separate member, is attached downward. A pressing portion 3418 is formed for moving upward by itself the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided on the side of the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440 by pressing it upward.

Next, the drive mechanism of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 will be described. The upper liquid crystal driving motor 3415 is attached to a motor accommodating portion 3485 formed on the right side of the upper liquid crystal accommodating portion 3480a in the front view of the liquid crystal accommodating portion 3480, and a spur gear-shaped upper liquid crystal driving gear 3420 is attached to the rotating shaft. ing. In addition, the upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421 has a large diameter spur gear-shaped large transmission gear 3421a that meshes with the upper liquid crystal drive gear 3420, and a small diameter spur gear shaped small transmission gear 3421b that rotates integrally with the large diameter transmission gear 3445a. Prepare. Further, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3422 that meshes with the small diameter transmission gear 3421 b of the upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421 and a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 3423 that meshes with the transmission gear 3422 are provided. The up-and-down drive gear 3423 meshes with a rack gear 3416 formed on the right side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411, and moves the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down as the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 rotates. A drive shaft arranged on the back side of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is connected to the elevation driving gear 3423, and the elevation driving gear 3423 arranged on the left side in front view is connected to the drive shaft. The up-and-down drive gear 3423 is meshed with a rack gear 3416 formed on the left side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 to apply the driving force of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 to move the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 up and down. .

The lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, as its drive mechanism, urges the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441 that supports the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 with a large self-weight upward in the assembled state of the game board 5. A biasing member 3442 for assisting the upward movement of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and a mechanism for vertically moving the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 by means of a lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 are provided. In the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, guide shafts 3443 having substantially the same length as the height of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are arranged on both sides of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 3443 is inserted through bearing portions 3444 formed on both left and right sides of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441 at two upper and lower positions.

Next, the drive mechanism of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 will be described. The lower liquid crystal driving motor 3445 is attached to a motor accommodating portion 3486 formed on the right side of the lower liquid crystal accommodating portion 3480b in the front view of the liquid crystal accommodating portion 3480, and a lower liquid crystal driving gear having a spur gear is attached to the rotating shaft. there is A large-diameter spur gear-shaped large-diameter transmission gear that meshes with the lower liquid crystal drive gear and a small-diameter spur-gear-shaped small transmission gear that rotates integrally with the large-diameter transmission gear are provided. Further, a spur-shaped transmission gear that meshes with the small-diameter transmission gear of the lower liquid crystal drive gear, and a spur-shaped elevation drive gear that meshes with this transmission gear are provided. The up-and-down drive gear meshes with a rack gear 3446 formed on the right side of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441, and moves the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down as the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 rotates. A drive shaft arranged on the back side of the lower liquid crystal display device is connected to the elevation drive gear, and an elevation drive gear arranged on the left side in front view is connected to the drive shaft. The elevation drive gear engages with a rack gear 3446 formed on the left side of the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441 to apply the driving force of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 to move the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 up and down.

By the way, in a general drive motor, static torque acts while the coil is not excited. This static torque is called a detent torque. When the detent torque is large, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotary shaft of the direct drive motor, the force resisting this is increased, making it difficult to rotate. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and power is not supplied to the driving motors 3415 and 3445, the detent torque cooperates with the biasing forces of the biasing members 3412 and 3442. As a result, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 function to resist the force that tends to move downward due to their own weight.

At this time, the combined value of the detent torque of the upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the biasing force of the biasing member 3412 (the directional component acting in the opposite direction to the weight of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) is higher than the downward force due to the weight of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. The upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and the biasing member 3412 are provided so that the combined force) is greater or approximately the same. Similarly, the combined value of the detent torque of the lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445 and the biasing force of the biasing member 3442 (acting in the opposite direction to the weight of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is more than the downward force due to the weight of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. The lower liquid crystal driving motor 3445 and the biasing member 3442 are provided so that the combined value of the forces of the directional components) is greater or approximately the same. Even if the magnitude of the biasing force of the biasing member changes, such a force relationship is established regardless of the positions of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the movable range. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using such a principle, a relatively heavy upper liquid crystal display device can be produced without applying a driving force by the driving motors 3415 and 3445. A structure is adopted in which the 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 can be held at appropriate positions.

However, on the other hand, when the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is tilted (flat state with the display surface of the liquid crystal facing upward or downward), the force due to the weight of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 acts. no longer. At this time, even if the magnitude of the biasing force of the biasing member 3412 changes, the biasing force of the biasing member 3412 is greater than the detent torque regardless of the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 in the movable range. An upper liquid crystal drive motor 3415 and an urging member 3412 are provided so as to form the same. Similarly, even if the magnitude of the biasing force of the biasing member 3442 changes, regardless of the position of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the movable range, the biasing force of the biasing member 3442 is greater than the detent torque. A lower liquid crystal driving motor 3445 and an urging member 3442 are provided so that . As a result, when the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 is tilted (flat position with the display surface of the liquid crystal facing upward or downward), both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 reach the upper end of the movable range. It will move upwards.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the liquid crystal display device 3600 (in this case, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is in a stationary state, the force to stay in place is reduced. is "A", the force exerted by the biasing member toward the first position (here, the uppermost part of the movable area of the liquid crystal display device 3600) is "B", and the force due to the weight of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is When the directional component (in this case, downward direction) force against "B" is "C", the liquid crystal display device 3600 is positioned at the second position (here, the liquid crystal display device) on the side opposite to the first position. 3600 (the lowest point in the movable area), "B" tends to increase, and "A < B ", in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall, regardless of the position in the movable range from the first position to the second position, "A>B -C" is established.

According to such a configuration, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be maintained in a stationary state at any position within the movable range without necessarily receiving the driving force from the driving source. That is, in this case, regardless of the weight of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be held still for a relatively long time at a plurality of positions within the movable range, thus increasing the degree of freedom. It is expected that the decrease in interest in games will be suppressed through high performance design.

However, it is important that the urging force of the urging member does not deteriorate significantly in order to allow such highly flexible performance design. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, until the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall, it is possible to simply place the urging member so that its own weight does not act on the urging force of the urging member (e.g., lay flat). Due to the relationship A<B, the effect moving body can automatically move to the first position and automatically stop the urging function of the urging member. As a result, deterioration of the biasing function is suppressed until the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall, and games can be provided under the above-described performance design with a high degree of freedom. become.

The detent torque can be changed by the drive source motor for moving the liquid crystal display device and the gear ratio of the gear meshed with it. For example, if the gear ratio is such that when the motor rotates three times, the meshing gear rotates once, the magnitude of the torque (=detent torque) is tripled. In this embodiment, since the weight of the liquid crystal display device is large, the detent torque is relatively large due to the high gear ratio.

Only when the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 are located at the position where the biasing force of the biasing member is maximized by changing the setting of the detent torque or the setting of the biasing force of the biasing member, the liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620 can be adjusted. 3620 may be moved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, a rotatable rotating member 3631 is provided at the center of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, and driving force is applied from a motor (not shown) through an endless belt provided on the back side of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. By giving it, an effect in which the rotating member 3631 rotates is executed. Further, guide portions 3630a extending downward from the outside of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are integrally formed at both left and right ends of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 when viewed from the front. A biasing member (spring) is connected. The guide part 3630 a can move up and down between the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the guide rod 3413 . Further, a rack gear 3630b is formed inside the guide portion 3630a, and is movable in conjunction with the plate-like member 3450 by meshing with a transmission gear 3451, which will be described later.

Further, inside the lower liquid crystal holding member 3441, between the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the guide portion 3630a of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, a plate member 3450 is slidably arranged. A guide slit 3450a (see FIGS. 103 and 104) is formed in the plate-like member 3450, and a rack gear 3450b is formed on the rear side of the guide slit 3450a in front view.

A transmission gear 3451 is arranged in a guide slit 3450a formed in the plate-like member 3450, and is arranged so that the rack gear 3450b of the plate-like member 3450 and the rack gear 3630b of the guide portion 3630a are engaged with each other. The plate-like member 3450 moves downward when the upper end of the plate-like member 3450 is pressed by the pressing portions 3418 formed at both ends of the lower side of the upper liquid crystal holding member 3411 . At this time, the transmission gear 3451 meshing with the rack gear 3450b of the plate member 3450 rotates, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack gear 3630b of the guide portion 3630a, thereby moving the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 upward. As a result, in the range where the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 is in contact with the plate member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the displacement of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is greater than the displacement of the upper liquid crystal drive unit. That is, it can be operated at high speed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the movable accessory (the body driving accessory 3700) arranged behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 will be described later. It is provided so that it can be visually recognized from the player side. In addition, when the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is completed and the performance space is generated, it is provided so as to be movable to the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 through the performance space.

However, if you try to realize such a large-scale, large-scale and complicated movable effect (specific movable effect), it will take time to move (switch) the multiple movable bodies in order, and the game interest will be reversed. It is feared that the For example, even if the movable accessory (body driving accessory 3700) placed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 becomes visible from the player side by starting the movement of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal It cannot move forward until the movement of the display device is finished and the effect space is generated. Moreover, even if the movement of the liquid crystal display device is started, unless the movement distance is sufficient, the entire surface of the movable accessory (body driving accessory 3700) cannot be visually recognized in the first place.

As described above, the liquid crystal decoration member (specific moving body) 3630 is positioned at the initial position (specific position) at the lower portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (the region including at least the lower frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) and the lower liquid crystal display device. Since it is arranged in a position overlapping both the upper part of the device 3620 (the region including at least the upper frame part of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620), the boundary between the two liquid crystal display devices can be hidden without discomfort.

Then, in such a state, when executing a specific movable effect using the movable accessory (body driving accessory 3700) placed behind the liquid crystal display device 3600, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 By moving the liquid crystal display devices 3620 in directions away from each other, an effect space for the movable accessory (body driving accessory 3700) is generated.

At this time, along with the movement of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is also partially separated from the lower part of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (the region including at least the lower frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610) and part of it when viewed from the front. From the superimposed state, it moves in a direction away from the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 (downward direction). However, as long as the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 is within the range where the plate-shaped member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 is pressed, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 itself can be placed on the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440. It moves in this direction at a higher speed than in the direction away from the liquid crystal display device 3610 .

According to such a movement of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 start to move away from each other, the movable accessory behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 (rear end The decoration unit 3700 (torso driving part)) can be generated relatively quickly, and when realizing large-scale, large-scale and complicated movable effects (specific movable effects), these movable bodies can be generated. It is possible to avoid the time required for the orderly movement (switching) of the . In addition, relatively soon after the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 start to move away from each other, the surface of the movable accessory behind them (rear end decoration unit 3700 (body driving section)) You will be able to expose the entire side.

As a result of moving the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 away from each other, when the pressing portion 3418 no longer abuts on the plate member 3450, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 moves away from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 itself. It will move in the form of being accompanied by this as it is. In this manner, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is configured such that the movement speed changes stepwise according to the progress of the presentation (movement distance). In this embodiment, by adjusting the length of the plate-like member 3450, it is possible to adjust the range in which the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 moves at a high speed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are moved in the same direction by the same amount of displacement, or are moved in the same manner in accordance with the performance of the liquid crystal display device 3600. A moving effect such as vibrating can be performed. However, in this case, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3610 and 3620, respectively. There is a concern that an unintended gap may occur between 3620 and . That is, in this case, since the rear end decoration unit 3700 secretly provided on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is exposed, the amusement of the game may decrease. However, on the other hand, if excessive restrictions are imposed on the movement of the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself due to concerns about such problems, it is advantageous to provide a drive mechanism in the liquid crystal display device 3600 to make it movable. is not fully utilized, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is provided so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 . Moreover, as long as the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal driving unit 3410 presses the plate-like member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 can be used for the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display. Since it is provided so as to maintain a position straddling the device 3620, even if an unintended gap occurs between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, it is preferably concealed. be able to As a result, it is possible to more positively execute the cooperative performance by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is superimposed on the movable decorative portion 3710 in a front view so that the movable decorative portion 3710 is difficult to see from the player side. A first effect state in which at least the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is positioned, and a second effect state in which at least the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is displaced from the position in the first effect state so that the movable decorative portion 3710 can be easily viewed from the player side. and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is displaced from the position where it is in the first effect state, the movable decorative part 3710 is difficult to see from the player side. At least one of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 (here, both of them) and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 are displaced together.

In this case, the occurrence of the first effect state and the third effect state causes the player side to misunderstand that ``the movable effect of only displacing the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is performed''. Later, it becomes possible to generate a second effect state. That is, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be made to appear in such a manner as to overturn the player's above-described recognition (the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is merely displaced in a movable effect). It is expected that a sense of surprise will be added to the movable effect to improve the interest in the game.

According to such a configuration of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself can be easily adjusted without worrying about an unintended gap between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. You will be able to actively liven up the performance through movement. For example, it is desirable that the liquid crystal display devices 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) move (eg, vibrate) in accordance with the motion of the effect image appearing in the display area.

However, if the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) simply moves (vibrates), is it simply moving (vibrating) the effect image in the display area? It can be assumed that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the display device 3600 is actually moving (vibrating). Therefore, when moving (vibrating) the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) in accordance with the effect image in the display area, not only the liquid crystal display device 3600 but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 It is desirable to move (vibrate) the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 provided on the front side accordingly. As a result, not only can the movable decoration part 3710 be hidden, but also the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be moved, so that not only the effect image in the display area but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself can be displayed. It becomes possible to make it easier to realize that it is moving.

Further, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is arranged so that the movable decoration part 3710 is easily visible from the player side, even if the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 does not move, the direction in which the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 moves (upper direction) direction) to contribute to the enlargement of the opening. As a result, a relatively large movable decorative portion 3710 (opening) can be made to appear while the movable region of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the pressure on the space with no margin on the rear side.

As will be described later, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is provided so that at least part of the liquid crystal electrodes (frame portions) of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are not exposed. And when the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moves, it is provided so as to move together at a position that hides the liquid crystal electrodes (frame portion). Further, the thickness of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is reduced to such an extent that another thick movable body (movable decoration portion 3710) can be advanced to the front side thereof.

When one of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 moves so as to make the movable decorative portion 3710 appear, at least part of the frame portion of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is exposed. Therefore, a darkening effect is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 3600 before the frame portion is exposed, and by making it difficult to notice the presence of the frame portion, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. desirable. At this time, if you want to create an effect, use an effect image (lightning, etc.) in which the black part due to darkening occupies more than half of the area of the display area. is desirable.

In addition, in the above-described third rendering state, both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are moved to conceal the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side. 3710 is arranged behind either the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 or the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and when only the liquid crystal display device on the arranged side is moved, the movable decorative portion on the rear side is moved. The presence of the movable decorative portion 3710 may be concealed by moving the movable decorative portion 3710 so as to follow it. However, in this case, it is necessary to provide a movable area for the movable decorative portion 3710 on the back side of the liquid crystal display device.

According to such a configuration, the secrecy of the movable decorative portion 3710 is maintained by special control such as moving the movable decorative portion 3710 even though the performance using the movable decorative portion 3710 is not performed. Therefore, it is extremely difficult for the player side to predict that the movable decorative portion 3710 exists on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 . In this case, by preparing an effect pattern that does not move the movable decorative portion 3710 when moving the liquid crystal display device on the side where the movable decorative portion 3710 is arranged, the liquid crystal display device can be viewed from the player's side. The movable decorative part 3710 appears to exist on the back side and sometimes does not exist, thereby attracting the player's interest and improving the operation.

In addition, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, the peripheral control board 4140 changes the above-mentioned first effect state and the above-mentioned third effect state within one variation period when the symbol variation is performed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is desirable to be able to perform effect control to generate the effect state and the second effect state in this order. That is, in this case, after making the player side misunderstand that ``the movable effect of only displacing the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is performed'' by the first effect state and the third effect state, the second effect state is performed. It is possible to generate a production state. As a result, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be made to appear in such a way as to overturn the player's above-described recognition (the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is merely displaced in a movable effect). It is expected that the performance will be given a feeling of surprise to improve the interest in the game.

Even when the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) moves, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 does not necessarily make the movable decorative portion 3710 arranged on the rear side appear. In order to achieve the purpose, the movable decorative portion 3710 does not necessarily have to move back and forth or deform.

As described above, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 operates in conjunction with the movement of the liquid crystal display device, making it possible to visually recognize the character objects arranged on the back side of the liquid crystal display device without discomfort. It should be noted that after the movement of the liquid crystal display device, the character placed on the back side may not be moved to the front side, but only be visible to the player. may be made to be visually recognized by the player. Also, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 does not need to be arranged so as to overlap the boundary between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, and may operate corresponding to the movement of the liquid crystal display device.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 (connecting accessory) moves, by performing an operation that makes the predetermined effect on the rear side visible as quickly as possible, a large and complicated movable effect In realizing the above, it is possible to suppress the time required for the switching.

[5-8c-3. Rear part unit (fuselage drive unit)]
Subsequently, despite being placed on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, when a specific movable effect is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, the decorative portion ( A description will be given of the rear end decoration unit 3700 (trunk drive unit) that moves the character (accessory) to produce an effect. First, the structure of the rear end decoration unit 3700 will be mainly described. FIG. 112(a) is a front view of the rear end decoration unit 3700, and FIG. 112(b) is a rear view. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the rear end decoration unit 3700, in which (a) is the initial state and (b) is the state in which the movable decoration part 3710 is advanced. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a state in which the rear end decoration unit 3700 has become visible due to the movement of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 115(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which a rear end decoration portion 3708 arranged so as to hide behind the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 is separated from the rear end decoration unit 3700. FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the state in which the rear end decorative portion 3708 is separated, viewed from the back side. 113 and 115, for convenience of explanation, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is shown in a state in which drive shafts 3734L and 3734R, which will be described later, are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 102, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is arranged so that the movable decoration part 3710 on the front face faces the opening 3480c formed in the liquid crystal housing part 3480. and at least one of the lower liquid crystal display devices 3620 moves away from the other so that the player can see through the opening 3480c between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. It's becoming

In order to make the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 visible, only the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 may be moved upward, or only the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be moved downward. Alternatively, both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be moved away from each other.

As a result of the liquid crystal display device 3600 moving in this way, when a predetermined separation distance is created between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be advanced through the space between them. become able to. Furthermore, as will be described later, when the movable decorative portion 3710 advances to a predetermined position, the movable decorative portion 3710 separates and can be deformed.

As shown in FIGS. 112, 113 and 115, a rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment includes a base portion 3701 provided to stand on the rear side when viewed from the front, and a A movable member group X that is arranged on the upper side of the front surface of the base portion 3701 and can be dynamically positioned, and a movable member group X that is arranged on the lower side of the front surface of the base portion 3701 in a front view and is statically positioned and a non-movable member group Y.

The base portion 3701 is provided with game board mounting portions 3702 at both ends of its upper and lower sides. It is structured to be attached to the rear surface side of the liquid crystal housing portion 3480 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112(b) and 115, an opening is formed in the base portion 3701, and a rear end decorative portion 3708 is attached so as to close the opening. By attaching the rear end decorative portion 3708, as shown in FIG. 113(b), when the movable decorative portion 3710 moves forward, the rear end decorative portion 3708 is provided so as to hide behind the movable decorative portion 3710 through the gap. becomes visible from the player side.

Further, the movable member group X is roughly divided into a movable decorative portion 3710 having a predetermined decoration in a front view, and a support drive that supports the movable decorative portion 3710 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (depth direction). A portion 3740 is provided, and as shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), both of these are portions that can move in the front-rear direction.

In particular, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment comprises an upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, a lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, an upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, and a lower right movable decorative portion 3710d, as shown in FIG. From the initial state of being arranged on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) is produced depending on their positional relationship. ing. Therefore, according to the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment, the point at which the player side can visually recognize through the opening 3480c between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Then, a specific decoration has already been created by the positional relationship of the plurality of movable decorations 3710a to 3710d.

However, as will be described later, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment moves forward to a predetermined position as described above, and then creates a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs). Each of the movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d is separated to temporarily destroy a specific decoration, and further positioned so that no decoration appears. Then, after that, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c are displayed in a manner different from when the specific decoration (here, the design that is the symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) is created. , and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d, respectively, it is possible to produce a new decoration that is different from the above-mentioned specific decoration. That is, in this case, one decoration can be kept secret until it is newly created, and the interest in the game can be maintained by the appearance of the specific decoration from the time of its appearance.

In addition, the support drive section 3740 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 includes a left support drive section 3740L that movably supports the upper left movable decoration section 3710a and the lower left movable decoration section 3710b of the movable decoration section 3710, respectively. , and a right support driving portion 3740R that movably supports the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d of the movable decorative portion 3710, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the left support drive section 3740L is provided with a combination drive motor 3730a for operating the upper left movable decorative section 3710a and the lower left movable decorative section 3710b, and similarly, the right support drive section 3740R. , a combination driving motor 3730b for operating the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d is arranged.

In addition, each combination drive motor 3730 is arranged outside the movable decorative portion 3710, and when the rear end decorative unit 3700 is attached to the game board 5 and the movable decorative portion 3710 is not operating, As shown in FIG. 114, it is positioned so as to be concealed by the rear standing wall 3312 of the back box 3310 arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 113(b), a guide rod 3715 is attached to the upper side of the base portion 3701 in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, a rod insertion portion 3741L is provided on the upper portion of the left support drive portion 3740L, and this rod insertion portion 3741L is inserted into the guide rod 3715 so as to be slidable. Similarly, a rod insertion portion 3741R is provided on the upper portion of the right support drive portion 3740R, and this rod insertion portion 3741R is inserted into the guide rod 3715 so as to be slidable.

That is, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the movement of the rod insertion portion 3741L in the front view in which the guide rod 3715 is inserted moves the upper left movable decoration portion 3710a and the left lower movable decoration portion 3710b. The movement of the first left arm portion 3705L moving in the depth direction is converted into the movement of the rod insertion portion 3741R inserted by the guide rod 3715, and the movement of the rod insertion portion 3741R in the front view is the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710c. The structure is such that the movement is converted into the movement of the first right arm portion 3705R that moves the movable decorative portion 3710d in the depth direction.

With the above configuration, when the forward driving motor 3720 provided in the non-movable member group Y moves the rod insertion portion 3741L and the rod insertion portion 3741R provided in the movable member group X in the central direction in which they approach each other, the state shown in FIG. As shown, the moveable fulcrum 3706 of the moveable ornament 3710 advances so that the entirety moves forward. Conversely, when the forward drive motor 3720 provided in the non-movable member group Y moves the rod insertion portion 3741L and the rod insertion portion 3741R provided in the movable member group X in the outward direction away from each other, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved. The movable fulcrum portion 3706 moves backward, and the whole moves backward.

However, as will be described later, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, there is another movement independent of the movement of the movable decoration portion 3710 in the front-rear direction according to the driving force applied by the forward driving motor 3720. As for the movement, the movable decorative portion 3710 can move forward and backward according to the driving force applied by the combination drive motors 3730 (the left combination drive motor 3730a and the right combination drive motor 3730b). ing.

Further, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the electric wiring arranged with bending on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is drawn into the base portion 3701, The electric wiring is supplied to the movable decorative portion 3710 through the right support drive portion 3740R and the left support drive portion 3740L. The electrical wiring can be extended (expanded and contracted) by the amount of bending, so that the movable decorative portion 3710 can be electrically connected to the electrical wiring as will be described later. It can be moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 .

That is, as will be described later, the rear end decoration unit 3700 can emit light when the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The movable decoration part 3710 of the decoration unit 3700 is positioned in the space on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The drive unit 3740L, etc.) is positioned so that at least the space behind the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is used, and the drive mechanism section on the rear side draws in from the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. The movable decorative part 3710 can emit light through the electric wiring arranged in the form of being inserted.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to move the movable decorative portion 3710 and apply decoration by light emission using the driving mechanism portion and electric wiring that are difficult to see from the player side by the liquid crystal display device 3600. become. In other words, when designing performance accessories, the demand for "contributing to the realization of difficulty in seeing the drive mechanism and electrical wiring" will be suppressed. By improving the degree of freedom in designing, it can be expected to realize an effect that can suppress the decline in interest in games.

In particular, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the drive mechanism and the electrical wiring drawn in from the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are movable decorations that move in the depth direction. When the 3710 is viewed from the front, it can fit within the projection plane. is no longer required.

Next, the operation mode of the rear end decoration unit 3700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. FIG. Fig. 116 shows the initial state, Fig. 117 shows the state in which the movable decorative parts are advanced, Fig. 117 shows the state in which the left and right movable decorative parts are rotated around the outer ends, and Fig. 118 shows the left and right movable decorative parts combined at the front. It is a figure which shows a state. 116 to 119, (a) is a top view, (b) is a front view, and (c) is a perspective view. 116 to 119, for convenience of explanation, the base portion 3701, the rear end decorative portion 3708, the first left arm portion 3705L, the first right arm portion 3705R, and the cover portion of the movable decorative portion 3710 are omitted. The rear end decoration unit 3700 is shown in the closed state.

A drive gear 3720a is mounted on the rotary shaft of the forward drive motor 3720 that moves the movable decorative portion 3710 forward, and as shown in FIG. A first rack gear 3721 that contributes to the sliding motion of the rod insertion portion 3741L and a second rack gear 3722 that is toothed upward and contributes to the sliding motion of the rod insertion portion 3741R are meshed with each other. there is

116(a) to (c), when the forward drive motor 3720 is driven (rotated clockwise), the rod insertion portion 3741L is rotated to the right, and the rod insertion portion 3741R is rotated to the right. Each slides to the left. 117(a) to 117(c) through the movement of the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R. As a result, the movable fulcrum 3706 of the movable decoration 3710 moves forward, and the whole moves forward.

Conversely, in the states shown in FIGS. 117(a) to (c), when the forward drive motor 3720 is reversely driven (counterclockwise), the rod insertion portion 3741L rotates leftward and the rod insertion portion 3741R rotates rightward. Each slides. 116(a) to 116(c) through the movement of the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R. , the movable fulcrum portion 3706 of the movable decorative portion 3710 moves backward, and the whole moves backward.

As described above, the drive gear 3725 mounted on the forward driving motor 3720 is arranged in parallel and meshes with the first rack gear 3721 that is tooth-cut downward and the second rack gear 3722 that is tooth-cut upward. By doing so, it becomes possible to move the second rack gear 3722 in the direction opposite to the direction in which the first rack gear 3721 moves.

However, it is expected that the presentation by the movable accessories in the game machine will attract the player's attention and enhance the interest, but the movable range of the accessories inside the game machine is easy for the player to predict, and the game interest will be increased. There are concerns about a decline in

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be moved in the front-rear direction by a separate movement (the combination drive motor 3730) independent of the movement by the forward drive motor 3720. The structure is such that it is possible to make the movement of the character appear, thereby making it possible to realize the movement of the character beyond the scope of the player's expectations.

That is, in the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, the support drive parts 3740L, R supporting the movable decoration part 3710 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction (depth direction) are provided with the forward driving motor 3720. In addition to the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R (see FIG. 115) that transmit driving force, as shown in FIGS. drive shafts 3734L and 3734R are provided for transmitting the driving force of .

Here, the drive shafts 3734L and 3734R are provided behind the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R (see FIG. 115), and one end side thereof is connected to the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. gears 3733L and 3733R are formed as gears 3733L and 3733R that mesh with suitable gears that rotate under the driving force of the gears 3736L, and the other end side of the gears 3736L is linked to the drive mechanism provided inside the movable decoration 3710. , R are formed as screw gears (worms) 3735L,R.

Two drive mechanisms are provided inside the movable decorative portion 3710 as drive mechanisms linked to the gear portions 3736L and 3736R. It functions to apply a predetermined amount (predetermined amount of rotation) of driving force. When a predetermined amount (predetermined amount of rotation) of driving force is applied to the drive mechanism of the first system, the movement of the drive mechanism of the first system is locked. , the driving force is applied to the drive mechanism of the second system when the driving force continues to be applied.

In the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, under such a driving principle, the movable decorations in the states shown in FIGS. A drive mechanism is provided to transform the portion 3710 into the state shown in Figures 118(a)-(c).

More specifically, when the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b are driven in the states shown in FIGS. When subjected to motion, they rotate. The movement (rotation) of the gears 3736L and 3736R is transmitted to the drive mechanism provided inside the movable decorative portion 3710, and finally the gears 3737L and 3737L provided on the side surface of the movable decorative portion 3710. R, 3738L, R, 3739L, R are rotated sequentially.

That is, in this case, when the three gears 3737L, 3738L, and 3739L rotate, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b move upward (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) so as to expose the internal left drive mechanism. 118(a) to 118(c). Similarly, when the three gears 3737R, 3738R, and 3739R rotate, the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d move upward (as viewed from the front) so as to expose the internal right drive mechanism. 118(a) to 118(c).

118(a) to 118(c), the movement of the drive mechanism of the first system is locked. However, as described above, if the combined driving motors 3730a and 3730b continue to apply the driving force in this locked state, the driving force will be applied to the second drive mechanism. The movable decorative portion 3710 in the states shown in 118(a)-(c) can be transformed into the states shown in FIGS. 119(a)-(c).

Although the details of the drive mechanism of the second system will be omitted, the gears 3736L and 3736R rotate gears different from before when the movement of the drive mechanism of the first system is locked. 119(a) to 119(c). In this case, the upper surfaces of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower surfaces of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d at the initial positions face the player side. That is, the rear end decoration unit 3700 can be transformed into a completely different mode by combining decorative surfaces that are invisible to the player in the initial position.

Conversely, in the states shown in FIGS. 119(a) to (c), when the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b are reversely driven, the state is shifted to the states shown in FIGS. 118(a) to (c). become. 118(a) to 118(c), the movement of the drive mechanism of the first system is unlocked, and the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b are further reversely driven. If it continues, it will move to the states shown in FIGS. 117(a) to 117(c).

According to such a configuration, when the states shown in FIGS. 117(a) to (c) are shifted to the states shown in FIGS. Each of the movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d that had produced the design symbolic of the team to which the specific character belongs is separated, and the specific decoration is once destroyed. Moreover, in the states shown in FIGS. 118(a) to (c), each of the movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d not only makes no decoration appear, but also the internal driving mechanism hidden by the cover part thereof. Such as revealing, a production situation is created as if the success or failure of the movable production failed.

In the states shown in FIGS. 118(a) to (c), the state shown in FIGS. 119(a) to (c) is produced after the performance situation is created as if the expectation for the big win is reduced. , each of the movable decorations 3710a to 3710d is positioned in such a manner as to newly create a decoration different from the specific decoration. That is, in this case, the preconceived notion that it is an accessory that forms a specific decoration at the time of its initial appearance is overturned, and instead of returning to the specific decoration, a new decoration different from this is created, so that the player's expectation is improved. It will be possible to provide a role production that exceeds

In this case, in order to appropriately improve the amusement of the game, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when a new decoration different from this is newly created than when it appears with a specific decoration at the time of initial appearance. should be high.

In addition, according to the above configuration, the movable decorative portion 3710 moves in the front-rear direction (depth direction) by the forward drive motor 3720 (the states shown in FIGS. 116(a) to (c) and the state shown in FIG. 117 (c)), the movement in the front-rear direction (depth direction) by the combined drive motors 3730a, b (Fig. 117(a) 119 (c) and the state shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to (c) using movement in the front-rear direction) and a structure that can independently appear. It is

That is, in this case, for example, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced in a specific direction (for example, forward direction) by the driving force from the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. It also becomes possible to displace itself in a direction opposite to the specific direction (for example, backward). That is, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be continuously displaced in a specific direction (for example, forward direction) to an extent that exceeds the range that can be assumed from the limited production space. It is expected that the decrease in interest in games will be suppressed through the realization of large movable effects.

More specifically, the movable decorative portion 3710 according to this embodiment is provided so as to be displaceable in the depth direction. If it tries to exceed , it collides with the glass plate 564 . Therefore, from the player's side, even if the movable decorative portion 3710 moves forward, it is expected that it will be limited within that range. When the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced forward, the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720 displaces the movable decorative portion 3710 itself in a direction opposite to the specific direction (for example, backward). For example, it is possible to make it appear as if the movable decorative portion 3710 is displaced forward to an extent exceeding expectations due to the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b.

In fact, in this pachinko machine 1, when the states shown in FIGS. 118(a) to (c) are shifted to the states shown in FIGS. At the same time that the driving force from the forward driving motor 3720 displaces the movable decorative portion 3710 in the forward direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 itself is displaced in a direction opposite to the specific direction (for example, backward). is also displaced. As a result, even in a limited performance space, a large character performance can be realized.

In addition, in the example according to this embodiment, while the movable decorative portion 3710 on the side closer to the player side is deformed, it is shown to move forward on a large scale. The movements of the first left arm portion 3705L and the first right arm portion 3705R, which are difficult to visually recognize, are made to simultaneously and secretly move backward. Therefore, while making it difficult for the player to grasp the movement to the rear side, it is possible to provide the performance of the character as if the limit is exceeded in the limited performance space.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, under the conditions that the relationships "A>B", "A>C", and "A<B+C" are respectively established, the rear end decoration unit 3700 is a liquid crystal display device. 3600 (the position shown in FIG. 84(b)) and the distance (length) from the front surface of the movable decorative portion 3710 to the glass plate 564 is defined as "A". When receiving the driving force from 3730a, b, the movable decorative portion 3710 can be displaced over a maximum length of "B" in the depth direction (here, the front side direction), and receives the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. In this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 is provided so as to be displaceable over a maximum length of "C" in the depth direction (here, the front side direction).

In this regard, when the peripheral control board 4140 moves the movable decorative portion 3710 based on the result of the big hit determination, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in the depth direction (here, the front side direction) by the driving force from the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b. and the amount of displacement in the depth direction (here, the front side direction) of the movable decorative portion 3710 due to the driving force from the forward driving motor 3720 is set to “B+C”, which is larger than “A” at maximum. While the movable structure is realized, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in the depth direction (here, the front side direction) by the driving force from the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b within a range in which the total value does not exceed "A". and displacement in the depth direction (here, front side direction) of the movable decorative portion 3710 by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720. As shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of driving sources are used at the same time, large movements that do not fit in the performance space are allowed, but each driving source alone can fit in the performance space without making you feel cramped. At the time of simultaneous driving, through the appropriate control of each drive amount, a dynamic movable performance is realized as if it exceeds the conventional limit in the performance space, and it is possible to improve the game interest. become.

It should be noted that the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment uses only the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b out of the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the forward drive motors 3720 based on the result of the big hit determination to move the movable decorative portion 3710. There are cases where the motion in the depth direction appears, and there are cases where the motion in the depth direction of the movable decorative portion 3710 appears using only the forward drive motor 3720, and depending on which one appears, the big win Expectations are different. Also, at this time, when only the forward drive motor 3720 is used to cause the movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 in the depth direction, the movable decorative portion 3710 extends over the maximum length of "B" in the depth direction (here, the front side direction). A production pattern that displaces the can appear.

However, even when the movement in the depth direction of the movable decorative portion 3710 is made to appear using only the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b, the movable decorative portion extends over the maximum length of "A" in the depth direction (here, the front side direction). A production pattern that displaces 3710 may be made to appear.

By making it possible to produce an effect mode using only one of the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the forward drive motor 3720, both the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the forward drive motor 3720 are simultaneously driven. If you do, you will be able to provide a thrilling feeling that you will not be able to fit in the production space.

That is, when only one of the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the forward drive motor 3720 is used to displace the movable decorative portion 3710 in a specific direction (single movable effect), the movable effect is within a predetermined finite space. appears (“A>B”, “A>C”). However, by providing such a single movable effect, "If driving force is applied from both the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the second forward drive motor 3720, it will not fit within a predetermined finite space. It is possible to make the player remember the feeling that a large-scale movable effect exceeding the limit will appear ("A<B+C").

In addition, when the driving force is applied from both the unitary drive motors 3730a and 3730b and the second forward drive motor 3720, it should be within a range that does not exceed a predetermined finite space (the total value of which is "A"). (within a range not exceeding and control related to the displacement of the portion 3710 in a specific direction. That is, in this case, it is possible to provide an interesting movable effect as if the predetermined finite space is about to be broken, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game.

By the way, in recent years, the display area of the effect display device has been increasing, and the players have come to feel such a large-scale effect in a rut. It is becoming difficult to contribute to maintenance. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the total area of the display area (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and Control is executed to intentionally reduce the area of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, which is the sum of the visible display areas. According to such a configuration, in a state in which the total area of the display area is not reduced, the user can feel that a relatively large display effect is being performed. It becomes possible to expect the maintenance of amusement interest when in the state.

However, in this case, in a state where the total area of the display area that can be visually recognized when viewed from the front is reduced, the user will feel that only a relatively small display effect can be performed. There is concern about a decline in interest in gaming. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the total area of the display area that is visible when viewed from the front is reduced, the space created by the reduction is used to make the total area of the display area When is relatively large, the movable decoration part 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700, which does not appear, is moved to the front of the display area. The amusement of the game is preferably maintained even when the total area of the displayed display area is reduced.

In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effect as the "production by movable accessories" described below, the liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) itself reduces the visible display area. You will be asked to move In this way, by causing the liquid crystal display device 3600 itself to daringly show a movement to reduce the display area, the player is made to realize that only a relatively small display performance can be performed. is expected.

[5-9. Production with movable parts]
Next, the movable effect including the effect by the rear end decoration unit 3700 (trunk driving section) in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 120 to 129. FIG. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the state before execution of the movable effect. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a state in which the upper liquid crystal display device has moved and the player can visually recognize the body driving section. 122 is a diagram showing the state of the body driving section in the state shown in FIG. 121. FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a state in which the movable decorative portion of the body driving portion has moved forward; 124 is a diagram showing a mode of the body driving section in the state shown in FIG. 123; FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a state in which the movable decorative portion of the body driving portion is separated. 126 is a diagram showing a mode of the body driving section in the state shown in FIG. 125; FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a state in which deformation of the movable decorative portion of the body driving portion is completed. 128 is a diagram showing a mode of the body driving section in the state shown in FIG. 127; FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a state in which the accessory of the front accessory unit is combined with the movable decorative portion after completion of deformation, and the combination effect is completed.

Now, assuming that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination by the main control MPU 4100a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines to execute control related to a specific movable effect using the trailing end decoration unit 3700. I do.

However, in a normal state in which no specific movable effects are performed, as shown in FIGS. It is provided behind the display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 .

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , shoulder drive unit 3220, full burst drive unit (lower accessory) 3230, right guideway 3250, etc.), the presence of these can be grasped, while the rear end decoration unit 3700 and the upper liquid crystal display device The driving mechanism of 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is structured such that the existence thereof cannot be even perceived by the liquid crystal display device 3600, the rear standing wall 3312, and the like.

That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using such a structure, the effect space is expanded in the depth direction, and multiple decorations are arranged so as to be hidden in the depth direction. As a dramatic effect, it is possible to realize the progress of the effect that gradually directs the player's gaze in the depth direction, or to create a huge and powerful effect that cannot be realized only by the effect space in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600. To enable a player to enjoy the character presentation without overlooking it.

121, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first controls at least the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 when performing control related to a specific movable effect using the rear end decoration unit 3700. One of them is moved away from each other, and control is performed to reduce the total area of the display area that can be visually recognized when viewed from the front. As a result, the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 is moved forward between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 by using the space corresponding to the reduction in the total area of the display area. A performance space that can only be moved will be created.

When the performance space is created in this way, the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 located on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 becomes visible from the player side. As a result, the effect of gradually directing the player's gaze toward the depth direction is first developed. In this state, the driving force is still applied to the movable decorations 3710 (the upper left movable decoration 3710a, the upper right movable decoration 3710c, the lower left movable decoration 3710b, and the lower right movable decoration 3710d) of the rear end decoration unit 3700. 122(a) to 122(d).

However, although the driving force has not yet been applied to any of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, The upper right movable decorative portion 3710c, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are arranged in a positional relationship that creates a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs). It is as described above.

Incidentally, since the effect space created in this way determines the size of the movable decorative portion 3710 itself that moves forward, it is required to create a larger effect space. However, on the other hand, since the display area of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is reduced by the amount that the effect space is enlarged, it is moved forward through the effect space even though it is a small effect space. It is desired to realize a large role production by the decoration.

In this regard, the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment is provided with a structure capable of meeting such demands, as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the movable decoration part 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment is thicker than the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 provided in front thereof. It is provided thickly, and has a structure that realizes a movable performance in which the thick portion of the movable decorative portion 3710 having such a thickness faces the player side.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a drives (rotates to the right) the forward drive motor 3720 in the state in which the performance space is created in this way, so that the movable decorative portion 3710 is rotated as shown in FIGS. Move it forward. By moving the movable decorative portion 3710 itself forward in this way, the rear end decorative portion 3708 arranged so as to hide behind the movable decorative portion 3710 is slightly visible from the player side. As a result, the effect of gradually directing the player's gaze toward the depth direction is secondly developed.

Also, at this time, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs control to displace the movable decorative portion 3710 forward over the maximum length of "B" when only the forward drive motor 3720 is used, so that the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b are controlled. If the drive control using is further performed, it gives a thrilling feeling that the limit of the production space may be exceeded.

However, the movable decorative portion 3710 does not necessarily have to be displaced forward over the maximum length of "B", and the entire movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned in front of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. As long as the forward drive motor 3720 is at least driven (rotated to the right) to a position where it completely protrudes, it is possible to realize a specific movable effect.

In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a drives the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b in a state in which the entire movable decorative portion 3710 completely protrudes forward from the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. 125 and 126, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b are separated from the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d. The display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are positioned so as to straddle each other when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, the movable decorative portion 3710, which is a physical object, is inserted between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 on which a specific effect image can be straddled. The movable decorative portion 3710 straddles the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 when viewed from the front. Even when the characters are separated from each other, the movable decoration part 3710 that functions to connect them can realize a coordinated effect, or make the player understand that the coordinated effect is to be performed. .

125 and 126, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d face the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. They are also positioned so that they overlap each other visually.

That is, during the period until the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is positioned on the front side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600, and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is positioned on the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Since they operate in conjunction with each other or operate in the manner shown in FIG. 111, from the player's point of view, the movable region of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is allowed to act as a character presentation. It looks like a performance space. Nevertheless, the movable decoration part 3710 moves to the space on the front side, which has been unused so far and is not recognized as a performance space, as if to break through such a permissible performance space. , the front-rear positional relationship between the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is reversed. As a result, it is possible to realize an effect that exceeds the expectations of the player, such as "How far will it move toward the player?"

In addition, even if the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved to an unused area in this way, it is difficult to grasp the positional relationship in the depth direction when viewed from the front. Although there is concern that the effects may not be sufficiently exhibited, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are positioned in front of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. Such concerns can be resolved favorably by making them overlap each other visually.

In the state shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the movable decorative portion 3710 is positioned in front of the rear end decorative portion 3708 disposed at the innermost portion so as to overlap with the rear end decorative portion 3708 in a front view. Nevertheless, in the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the movable decorative portion 3710 moves (deforms) in such a manner as to reduce the portion overlapping the rear end decorative portion 3708 in front view. As a result, the rear end decorative portion 3708 arranged so as to hide behind the movable decorative portion 3710 can be easily seen from the player's side, and the player's gaze is gradually directed in the depth direction. will be the third progress.

Also, in such a state, each of the movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d that had produced a specific decoration (here, a design that is a symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) separates, and the specific decoration is once destroyed. In addition to that, not only does it not make any decoration appear, but the internal drive mechanism that was hidden by the cover part is exposed, creating a production situation as if the success or failure of the movable production failed. It is as described above.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment, even after creating a production situation as if the success or failure of the movable production has failed, the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b continue to be driven. As shown in 128, the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a, the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b, and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710a are moved in a manner different from when the specific decoration (here, the design that is the symbol of the team to which the specific character belongs) is created. By positioning the decorative portion 3710c and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d, a new decoration (in this case, the trunk of the robot) different from the specific decoration is created.

More specifically, the upper surfaces of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c in the initial position and the lower surfaces of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d face the player side. By doing so, a new decoration (here, the trunk of the robot) different from the above-mentioned specific decoration is created.

According to such a configuration, by combining decorative surfaces that cannot be visually recognized by the player at the initial position, a completely different decoration with a completely different shape appears. be able to The upper surfaces of the upper left movable decorative portion 3710a and the upper right movable decorative portion 3710c in the initial position, and the lower surfaces of the lower left movable decorative portion 3710b and the lower right movable decorative portion 3710d are shown in FIG. 84(b). It is a part related to the thick part, and by realizing a movable effect at such a part, even though it is a small effect space, the decoration moved forward through the effect space makes it possible to create a large accessory. performance can be realized. In fact, the robot body portion shown in FIG. 127(a) is constructed by arranging two thick portions of the movable decorative portion 3710, and its width is the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device. It is larger than the vertical width of the space provided between the display devices 3620, and its area is also larger than the opening area of the same space.

125 and 126 to the states shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the movable decorative portion 3710 is further moved forward by the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b. becomes. However, at this time, the movable decorative portion 3710 has already moved forward over the maximum "B" length when the forward drive motor 3720 is used, so when the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b are used, It cannot be moved further forward over the maximum "C" length of . Nevertheless, in order for the robot torso to be formed, it is necessary to move further forward over the maximum "C" length when using the docking drive motors 3730a,b, which Since the collision with the glass plate 564 is unavoidable, the forward driving motor 3720 is driven to such an extent that it is impossible to realize a specific movable effect from the player's side. , It seems as if it is foretelling that a specific movable effect will not be realized.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4150a simultaneously drives the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b and reversely drives the forward drive motor 3720, thereby realizing a large movable effect even in such a limited space. I'm trying

In the state shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the movable decorative portion 3710 of the innermost rear end decorative portion 3708 overlaps with the movable decorative portion 3710 in the state shown in FIGS. The movable decorative portion 3710 is moved (deformed) so as to expose the portion which is located at the position and is difficult to be visually recognized. As a result, of the rear end decorative portion 3708 arranged so as to hide further behind the movable decorative portion 3710, the part that was made difficult to be visually recognized becomes easy to be visually recognized from the player side, and gradually becomes visible in the depth direction. The fourth development is the production that directs the player's gaze to .

129, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the robot body to appear in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 by means of the movable decorative portion 3710. Then, as shown in FIG. The face part 3210b) and the shoulder drive part 3220 (left arm part 3220a, right arm part 3220b) are moved in a direction approaching the robot torso and positioned so as to form the robot's face and shoulders, respectively, to display the liquid crystal display. A specific movable effect that makes a large robot appear on the front side of the device 3600 is executed.

After the appearance of the large-sized robot, the procedures for returning the face drive unit 3210, the shoulder drive unit 3220, and the movable decoration unit 3710 to their initial positions are the opposite of those for the appearance. The part 3210 and the shoulder driving part 3220 move away from the robot body part (movable decorative part 3710) and return to the initial position. 127 and 128, the state shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the state shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, and the state shown in FIGS. 121 and 122. , and then the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move closer to each other so that the effect space between them disappears, and the specific movable effect ends. .

According to such a specific movable effect, the ornaments (face driving section 3210, shoulder driving section 3220) arranged at the initial position in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear space of the liquid crystal display device 3600 In a state where the decoration (movable decoration part 3710) arranged at the initial position is positioned in the front space of the liquid crystal display device 3600, one decoration (robot) is created according to the mutual positional relationship. That is, in this case, the space behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 also contributes to the performance of the characters realized on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and contributes to the enlargement of the liquid crystal display device 3600. A large-scale (including the thickness of the decoration that appears) performance that cannot be realized only by the members in the space in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be realized in the space in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600. Note that the decoration (robot) that appears in this way is thicker than the liquid crystal display device 3600 .

In addition, after expanding the performance space in the depth direction in this way, the front side decorations (face driving section 3210 and shoulder driving section 3220) positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are arranged. At least one of the rear ornament (movable ornamental portion 3710) located in the position moves in the depth direction, and cooperates to perform a predetermined ornamental effect (appearance of the robot) when approaching each other. It is possible to realize a moving effect with a three-dimensional effect using the movement in the depth direction, and it can be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Such movement in the depth direction only needs to have a component in the depth direction. may be performed.

In addition, in such a specific movable effect, a movable decorative portion 3710 is provided so as to hide behind the liquid crystal display device 3600, and the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal display device 3600 are moved. , the movable decorative portion 3710 can be projected to a region on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to expose a specific decorative shape (body portion). Therefore, even if the area in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 does not have enough space for arranging the performance accessories, the ornaments (face driving section 3210 (left face section 3210a and right face section 3210a and A movable decorative portion 3710 having a shape (specific decorative shape) different from that of the portion 3210b) and the shoulder driving portion 3220 (the left arm portion 3220a, the right arm portion 3220b)) suddenly appears and disappears from the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. It can be expected that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed by such a novel performance that the player cannot imagine.

In addition, as a condition (predetermined effect condition) where such a specific movable effect appears, for example, a specific variation pattern is selected in the special symbol variation pattern setting process, or the execution of the jackpot game is started. , etc. can be employed. Here, when the performance condition is that a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific movable performance is started and ended between the start and the end of the variation of the special symbol. Thus, when the effect condition is that the execution of the jackpot game is started, a specific movable effect is started and ended during the execution period of the jackpot game.

Further, the large-scale character performance thus realized may be such that the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is covered.

In addition, the ornaments (the left face 3210a, the right face 3210b, the left arm 3220a, and the right arm 3220b of the front accessory unit 3200) arranged in the region on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 are not necessarily entirely does not need to be in front of the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 3600, at least a part of the specific portion is in front of the display surface, and the decoration that appears with the specific portion and the movable decorative portion 3710 is the liquid crystal display device 3600. If it appears on the front side of the display surface, a large-scale (including the thickness of the decoration that appears) performance that cannot be realized only by the members in the space on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can be realized by using the liquid crystal display. It can be realized in the front space of the display device 3600 .

In addition, the ornaments arranged in the area on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the left face portion 3210a, the right face portion 3210b, the left arm portion 3220a, and the right arm portion 3220b of the front character object unit 3200) are not driven. Even when it is in the state (initial position), at least a part thereof should be on the front side of the display surface.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is arranged on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, and the movable decorative portion 3710 of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is viewed from the front. It is provided with a structure that makes it possible to change from a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it to a state in which it is easy to visually recognize it when viewed from the front. Then, when the movable decorative portion 3710 is made to be easily visible in a front view, a specific role performance using the movable decorative portion 3710, which has been made difficult to be visually recognized until then, and decorations provided separately from this, is performed. Since it can be performed, it becomes possible to realize a more powerful character performance, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the above-described specific movable effect, a specific portion (movable decoration portion 3710) of the rear end decoration unit 3700 disposed on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is moved to the liquid crystal display device 3600 as a whole. When the movable decoration 3710 is positioned on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the initial state shown in FIG. 120) and when the movable decoration 3710 is positioned so as to protrude forward from the movable decoration 3710 . Movable decorative portion 3710 and liquid crystal display device 3600 are visible from the front in both the state where portion 3710 is positioned in front of liquid crystal display device 3600 and is in the state of effecting (the effect state shown in FIG. 129). They are positioned so that they overlap each other.

That is, in this case, the movable decorative portion 3710 hidden behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and hides at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 3600, so that the player can At such a position as to deprive the user's gaze of the user, the performance of the character is performed in cooperation with the other decorations (the face driving section 3210 and the shoulder driving section 3220). As a result, the player's gaze is shifted from the liquid crystal display device 3600 positioned to hide the movable decorative portion 3710 to the movable decorative portion 3710 positioned to hide the liquid crystal display device 3600 . A player can enjoy a huge and powerful character performance that cannot be realized only in the performance space on the front side without missing it.

In this way, the movable decorative portion 3710 hides at least a part of the liquid crystal display device 3600 as if to deprive the player of attention, so that even during the period when the specific movable effect is performed, , without considering the possibility that the player may miss the performance of the character, the liquid crystal display device 3600 in which the total area of the display area that is visible when viewed from the front is reduced is positively displayed. will be able to go to As a display effect during the period in which such a specific movable effect is performed, an effect (darkening display or lightning running display) that enhances the interest when the character object effect is performed by the movable decorative portion 3710 appears. Something like Also, at this time, if one coordinated display effect is performed across the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, the movable decoration part 3710 breaks the one display effect from the rear side and It is possible to provide a novel effect as if the player has moved forward.

However, it cannot be said that simply placing an ornament in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 can necessarily deprive the liquid crystal display device 3600 of attention. For example, even if the face driving unit 3210 and the shoulder driving unit 3220 are used as such decorations, as described above, even in a state where a specific movable effect is not performed, the player can move the player to the side. 120(b)), such a known decoration is placed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. Even if it is positioned, it is difficult to say that it will have the effect of attracting the player's attention.

In this regard, the rear end decoration unit 3700 according to this embodiment, as described above, when positioned behind the liquid crystal display device 3600, not only the liquid crystal display device 3600 but also the liquid crystal display device 3600 has a structure in which its existence is concealed by different members (rear standing wall 3312 and liquid crystal decorative member 3630), and the movable decorative portion 3710 of the highly concealable rear end decorative unit 3700 is By moving it to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, it is expected that the liquid crystal display device 3600 will more certainly deprive the player of his attention.

In addition, in the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, after depriving the gaze by such a movable decorative portion 3710 (see FIG. 125), the movable decorative portion 3710 continues until then (see FIGS. 121 and 123). (see FIG. 127), by creating a completely different decoration (body of the robot) on a different decoration surface, it is possible to further attract the player's attention (see FIG. 127). After that, the known decorations (face drive section 3210, shoulder drive section 3220) approach the movable decoration section 3710 where the player's gaze is concentrated to create one decoration (robot). , the player's attention can be gathered and enjoyed during the period from the appearance of the movable decoration part 3710 to the creation of one decoration (robot).

The liquid crystal display device 3600 according to this embodiment includes an upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and a lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Any device may be provided as long as it is arranged behind at least one of the liquid crystal display devices 3620 . However, if the display effect appears on both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a state in which the movable decoration portion 3710 of the rear end decoration unit 3700 is moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, It is preferable that the movable decorative part 3710 is positioned so as to overlap both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a front view in order to more reliably deprive the liquid crystal display device 3600 of attention.

At this time, one decoration (robot) created by the movable decoration part 3710 and the known decorations (face driving part 3210, shoulder driving part 3220) can be either the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 or the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Appearing with a larger area when viewed from the front is desirable in order to more reliably deprive the liquid crystal display device 3600 of attention.

In addition, by positioning the movable decoration part 3710 (or one decoration (robot)) so as to straddle both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, the upper liquid crystal display device Even when the 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are separated from each other, the player side can easily recognize that the display effects are performed in cooperation with each other.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, the movable decorative part 3710 located so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, or one decoration (robot) is made to emit light, The upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and the ornaments connecting them perform a coordinated effect, so that the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in a separated state cooperate with each other. It is more desirable to realize At this time, the part of the movable decoration part 3710 or one decoration (robot) positioned between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 can emit light. It is more desirable to realize a coordinated presentation between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in the . More preferably, the light-emitting portion itself straddles the upper liquid crystal display 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display 3620 which are in a spaced apart state.

In addition, as a cooperative effect realized by the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 in such a separated state and the decoration (movable decorative portion 3710) connecting them, for example, the upper liquid crystal display device It is possible to realize an effect in which one decoration appears by the effect image displayed on the 3610, the decoration (movable decorative part 3710) which is a real object, and the effect image displayed on the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. is.

In addition, in the specific movable effect according to this embodiment, as described above, among the liquid crystal display device 3600, the movable decorative portion 3710, and the rear end decorative portion 3708, the liquid crystals positioned on the front side of the rear end decorative portion 3708 are displayed. By moving the display device 3600 and the movable decorative portion 3710, the movable decorative portion 3710 arranged to hide behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 changes the distance in the depth direction from the rear end decorative portion 3708. By protruding to a region on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 so as to expand, the decorative shape of the movable decorative portion 3710 and the rear end decorative portion 3708 on the rear side thereof can be visually recognized from the front side. become. In this way, after expanding the effect space in the depth direction, the player's gaze is gradually directed in the depth direction as a multiple effect with the movable decorative portion 3710 and the rear end decorative portion 3708 arranged so as to be hidden in the depth direction. By realizing the production progress (1st progress, 2nd progress, 3rd progress, 4th progress) that directs the , it is now possible to appeal the degree of depth that was not possible in the past. , the decline in game interest can be suppressed. In addition, the effect using the movement of the movable decorative portion 3710 to the front side is not limited to the area on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, but spreads in the depth direction to the area on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

129, the front ornaments (face driving section 3210, shoulder driving section 3220) located in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the liquid crystal display When a predetermined decoration effect (appearance of a robot) is performed with a rear decoration (movable decoration part 3710) positioned on the rear side of the device 3600, it is located between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620. Although the effect space is made visible, other decorations provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 may be moved to the front side of the effect space to make it difficult to visually recognize.

Further, in order to realize the effect of moving the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal display device 3600 does not necessarily have to be movable. For example, the movable decorative portion 3710 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 may be moved to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 by moving around from the lateral side of the liquid crystal display device 3600 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving mechanisms (guide rods 3413, guide shafts 3443, etc.) of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) in the liquid crystal drive unit 3400 are mounted on the rear walls. While hidden by 3312 (while making it difficult to see from the player when viewed from the front), on the front side of the standing wall 3312, a mounting portion (mounting hole, etc.) for mounting the front accessory unit 3200 is provided. With such a configuration, the function of concealing the driving mechanism by the rear standing wall 3312 and the function of attaching the front accessory unit 3200 are realized, and the space in the depth direction is not wasted, and the peripheral edge of the liquid crystal is not used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving mechanism of the rear movable unit from being visually recognized.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the driving mechanism of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620) is arranged on the lateral side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (almost the same depth as the main liquid crystal display in the depth direction). In front of the liquid crystal display device 3600, the liquid crystal frame portions of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and these liquid crystal devices are moved. A rear box 3010 having a rear standing wall 3312 is provided so as to cover the liquid crystal frame portion and the drive mechanism so as to straddle the drive mechanism for the display (to make it difficult for the player to see from the front). . As a result, it is possible to prevent a large difference in level between the main liquid crystal display device 3600 and the driving mechanism of the main liquid crystal display device 3600, and to simplify the concealment structure by the rear wall 3312 of the back box 3010. (The rear erected wall 3312 can be formed into a substantially wall shape with less unevenness).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the driving mechanism on the lateral side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 is provided from the front side to the rear side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (exceeding the thickness of the liquid crystal). By effectively using the lateral space of the device 3600 to provide the drive mechanism, it is possible to provide such a large drive mechanism (and thus the large liquid crystal drive unit 3400) without wasting the space in the depth direction.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 96, 100 and 101, the receiving port (for example, starting port, etc.) in the right hitting game area 2540 is communicated with and entered the same receiving port. A right guiding path 3250, which is at least part of a discharge passage for discharging game balls to the outside of the game machine, is integrally formed with a right rail portion 3240 constituting a driving mechanism of a full burst driving portion 3230 of the front accessory unit 3200. is provided in According to such a configuration, the driving mechanism of the front accessory unit 3200 is also used as a discharge passage, so the space on the back side can be effectively utilized. In addition, a supporting member (in this embodiment, the right side rail portion 3240) that supports the full burst driving portion 3230 is fixed to the base member (back box 3010) for stable driving of the movable accessory. ), the impact of vibrations and the like when the movable accessory is driven is suppressed by the rigidity of the fixed support member, and the ball can be guided stably.

In this embodiment, a stepped portion 3315 is formed corresponding to the movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440, and the vertical wall 3312 allows the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 to move. Although the drive mechanism is suitably concealed in , the stepped portion 3315 may have the function of restricting the movable range of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 . That is, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is moved by driving the lower liquid crystal driving unit 3440 as described above, and the stepped portion 3315 moves both the initial position when the unit is not driven and the maximum driving position when the unit is driven. You may make it restrict|regulate by both, and you may make it restrict|regulate only one. In particular, when the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 is not driven, it functions as a gap between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 to be recognized as one continuous display device, and the gap between the two display devices and the frame portion. With respect to the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, it is extremely important to suppress the positional deviation because the positional deviation of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 reduces the interest of the player. Therefore, at least when the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 is not driven, the position of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is naturally restricted by the stepped portion 3315, which is extremely effective in suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, in this embodiment, the rear standing wall 3312 of the back box 3010 has a shape surrounding the main liquid crystal display device 3600 , but for example, it is erected only on one side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 . It may be provided in such a manner that it is provided upright on both the left and right sides or on the upper and lower sides, and the standing position is not limited. It should be noted that, for example, in the case where the rear standing wall 3312 is provided so as to stand only on one side, the liquid crystal horizontal drive mechanism is also arranged only on one side of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 in accordance with the rear standing wall 3312 . will be placed.

Further, in this embodiment, a liquid crystal decoration member 3630 that can move in front of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 (upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and lower liquid crystal display device 3620) by a drive mechanism provided on the side of the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is provided. Although it is always positioned in front of the display device, it is positioned between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 and does not have the function of hiding the gap between these display devices and the frame portion. When regarded as a movable decorative member, the following aspects may be adopted.

That is, the movable decorative member (liquid crystal decorative member 3630), which is positioned in front of the display device even when not driven in the above embodiment, is positioned behind the above-described rear standing wall 3312 when not driven. It may be hidden together with the drive mechanism and appear in front of the main liquid crystal display device 3600 from behind the rear erected wall 3312 during driving. Conventionally, such a movable decorative member that appears in front of the display device is arranged on the front side of the display device, including its drive mechanism. It is not limited to just beside the display device, but it may be located on the back side of the display device in the depth direction), so a movable decorative member that effectively utilizes the space in the depth direction by using the thickness of the display device can do. In addition, by unitizing the drive mechanism on the side of the display device and the movable decorative member (corresponding to the liquid crystal decorative member 3630) that can be driven by this drive mechanism together with the display device, the movable decorative member appearing in front of the display device can be changed. It is possible to realize a new form of a display device unit having.

In this embodiment, as described above, the pressing portion 3418 and the plate-shaped member 3450 are pressed or released as the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move closer to or away from each other. was employed as the mechanism of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630. According to such a configuration, as a result of moving the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 away from each other, the pressing portion 3418 of the upper liquid crystal drive unit 3410 presses the plate member 3450 of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440. There is no change in the downward driving mode of the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 between when the pressing portion 3418 is displaced within the pressing range and when the pressing portion 3418 is displaced within the range where the plate member 3450 is not contacted. In spite of this (although the lower liquid crystal drive unit 3440 only maintains drive control to move the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 downward at a predetermined speed), the moving speed of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is changed stepwise. Therefore, the stepwise speed change of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 can be easily realized without providing a new drive source or the like for changing the moving speed of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 .

Further, according to this embodiment, the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is provided so as to straddle the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 . According to such a configuration, a deviation in control occurs between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, or rebounding occurs due to physical interference between the upper liquid crystal display device and the lower liquid crystal display device. Even if an unintended gap occurs between the 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, it can be preferably concealed. On the other hand, if the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is sufficiently overlapped with the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 to hide this gap, the movable accessory behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the rear end decoration unit 3700 ( It takes a lot of time to move the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 to form the effect space of the body driving section)). For this reason, in this embodiment, as described above, the relationship between the pressing portion 3418 and the plate-like member 3450 is adjusted so that the speed can be increased at least in the portion overlapping the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 . Therefore, even though the upper liquid crystal drive unit and the lower liquid crystal drive unit are operating, the movable accessory behind the liquid crystal display device 3600 (the rear end decoration unit 3700 (body drive section)) appears. This is preferably suppressed. In this embodiment, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 overlaps the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. However, it is not necessary to overlap the upper liquid crystal display device 3610. The drive unit )) may overlap all or part of the gap between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 to such an extent that it cannot be seen from the gap when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in a specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the driving force from the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b. When displacing, by displacing the movable decorative portion 3710 itself in a direction opposite to the specific direction (backward direction) by the driving force from the forward drive motor 3720, the movable decorative portion 3710 exceeds expectations. However, the movement of the movable accessory is not limited to the depth direction (forward and backward directions), and can also be performed in other directions. It may be in the height direction or the horizontal direction. In this case, unlike the depth direction, the player can easily see the action in the direction opposite to the specific direction, so it is difficult to expect an unexpected effect, but the limited effect space (liquid crystal display) There is no change in the fact that effects that are difficult to achieve in the front space) can be realized. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to see the action in the direction opposite to the specific direction, the movable decoration part 3710 is caused to emit light when the action is in the direction opposite to the specific direction, and the player can see the movement in the direction opposite to the specific direction. You can do things that attract the attention of Further, the specific direction and the direction opposite to the specific direction do not necessarily have to be 180 degrees apart, and the above effects can be obtained as long as the direction component is included. In this embodiment, the driving force from the combination driving motors 3730a and 3730b causes the movable decorative portion 3710 to move forward by rotating. can also be employed.

In this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved in a specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720, the movable decorative portion 3710 is moved forward by the driving force from the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b. , the driving force from the forward driving motor 3720 displaces the movable decorative portion 3710 itself in a direction opposite to the specific direction (backward direction). The forward drive motor 3720 and the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b move forward at the same time without moving in the opposite direction (rearward) to adopt a special effect pattern in which the movable decorative portion 3710 appears. can be In this case, the combination effect by the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b is not performed after moving the movable decorative portion 3710 in a specific direction (forward direction) by the forward drive motor 3720. , the player can be made to recognize it as a union confirmation pattern, and when the degree of expectation of the union performance is high, the player can be made to pay more attention to the performance.

Alternatively, an effect pattern may be adopted in which only the forward driving motor 3720 moves independently and the combination driving motors 3730a and 3730b return without moving. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect of whether or not the movement of the combination drive motors 3730a and 3730b will lead to the combination effect. Furthermore, it is denied that the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b operate (the combined drive motors 3730a, It may be made to function as an effect (a disappointing effect) as if the space in which b can operate is crushed). Also, after this negation, a revival pattern may be adopted in which the combination drive motors 3730a, b move to lead to a combination effect, and if this revival pattern develops into a combination effect, the expectations are higher than in the fixed combination pattern. may

Alternatively, an effect pattern may be employed in which only the unitary drive motors 3730a and 3730b move alone and the forward drive motor 3720 does not move. In this case, by providing a single movable effect pattern (a pattern in which only the combined drive motors 3730a and 3730b move, and a pattern in which only the forward drive motor 3720 moves), when both drive sources are driven, it fits in the space. It is preferable to make the player remember the feeling that it will be gone. Also, it is possible to realize a thrilling effect that the movable decorative portion 3710 will hit the glass on the front of the game machine beyond the limited space (the space in front of the liquid crystal) with the character.

In this embodiment, as described above, each movable decorative portion 3710a to 3710d is separated from the state in which each movable decorative portion 3710a to 3710d forms a specific decoration (states shown in FIGS. 113 and 117), and the specific decoration is temporarily removed. Dismantle them and position them in such a way that no decorations appear (state in Fig. 118). Then, after that, each of the movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d is combined in a different plane from when the specific decoration was created, thereby creating a new decoration that is larger in front view than the specific decoration. It was decided to perform an effect to produce (the state of FIG. 119). According to such a configuration, the preconceived notion that it is an accessory that forms a specific decoration at the time of initial appearance is overturned, and a decoration different from this is newly created without returning to the specific decoration. It becomes possible to provide a character performance that exceeds the expectations of the person.

In this embodiment, the movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d are combined again to generate a new decoration after being separated once from the state of forming the specific decoration. The movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d may be combined with, for example, other movable decorative members provided in front of the liquid crystal or decorations of the center role to generate new decorations (the first decoration may be , may be positioned so as to form one decoration with the second decoration, and may be positioned so as to form one decoration with the third decoration). In this case as well, the preconceived notion that the accessory forms a specific decoration at the time of its initial appearance is overturned, and a decoration different from this is newly created without returning to the specific decoration. It will be possible to provide a role production that exceeds By combining this with the above-described embodiment, for example, once separated from the state in which the specific decoration was formed, each of the movable decorative parts 3710a to 3710d becomes different from when the specific decoration was created. Whether to generate a new decoration by combining with the surface, or to generate a new decoration by combining with other movable decorative members or decorations of the center role, etc., can be selected according to the expected degree of jackpot. By doing so, the player faces the game while paying attention to which direction to proceed.

In this embodiment, as described above, it is assumed to be in the waiting position (original position) behind the main liquid crystal display device 3600 in a specific decorative shape (in this embodiment, the design that is the symbol of the team). According to such a configuration, the decorative mode can be generated from the appearance of the movable decorative portion 3710 . Moreover, in this embodiment, since the movable decorative portion 3710 is exposed by moving the liquid crystal display device, a specific decoration can be made to appear without the need to operate the movable body itself.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in the state of the specific decoration (the state of FIG. 113), the effect space generated in the depth direction by the movement of the liquid crystal display device is sized to be movable in the depth direction. On the other hand, in a state where a specific decoration is once broken and a new decoration is generated (the state of the torso character, for example, the state of FIG. 119), the effect space generated in the depth direction by the movement of the liquid crystal display device is changed to the depth direction. It has a larger ornamental shape that cannot be moved in any direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the movable range of the liquid crystal display device and the arrangement space behind the liquid crystal for the shape of the required movable character production, and the liquid crystal display during the movable character production can be suppressed. It becomes possible to achieve a relatively large character performance without greatly sacrificing the performance.

Further, regarding the movable decorative portion 3710, when the state of the specific decorative shape (the state of FIG. 113) is temporarily destroyed to create a new decoration (the state of the robot body portion, the state of FIG. 119), the specific decoration Since it connects with other movable bodies (driving part 3210 and shoulder driving part 3220) that were not connected in the form state (the state of FIG. 113), it is possible to dramatically improve the variations and sizes that can be realized as a role performance. become able to.

In addition, the movable character that can move in front of the liquid crystal is conventionally often arranged at a position behind the center character so that it is difficult for the player to see it at the periphery of the liquid crystal. Since a part of the driver is visually recognized, the performance of the character can be imagined before driving, and there is a possibility that the surprise of the performance of the character cannot be given sufficiently. In this regard, in this embodiment, the movable decorative portion 3710 is usually kept behind the invisible liquid crystal display device, and the liquid crystal is moved to appear in front of the liquid crystal during driving, thereby eliminating such concerns. is doing. In addition, since the movable decoration part 3710 appears from the back of the liquid crystal display device, it is difficult to see the link mechanism when the movable accessory is put out in front of the liquid crystal display device. The player can be given an impression as if the decoration part 3710 appeared.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are installed in the hall, the detent torque of the drive motor and the additional force are stronger than the downward force due to the weight of the upper and lower liquid crystal display devices 3610 and 3620. The driving motor and the biasing member are provided so that the composite value of the biasing force of the biasing member (the composite value of the directional components acting in the opposite direction to the self weight) is greater or substantially the same. According to such a configuration, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 do not necessarily need to be provided with a driving force from the driving source even if they are held at any position within the movable range. , can be used as original positions (production stop positions).

For this reason, for example, as the original position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, a plurality of positions are set in which the degree of expectation for a big win increases as the distance from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 increases, and the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is positioned at any of the plurality of positions. Depending on whether the game is played, the degree of expectation for a big hit developed on the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may differ (even if the same effect is displayed, it may be displayed at a position away from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 The higher the liquid crystal display device 3610 is, the higher the expectation is. As a result, even if the fluctuation time until the result of the big win is displayed is long, it is not necessary to drive the driving source for stopping the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and the predetermined position of the movable range is set to the original position. It is possible to realize the production that was done.

Also, the performance using a plurality of positions in the movable range as the original position may be performed over a plurality of variations. For example, the position where the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is arranged differs depending on the production mode over a plurality of fluctuations, and for example, the farther the position of the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 from the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, the so-called stochastic fluctuation state is expected. It is also possible to achieve high performance. The plurality of fluctuations may be a so-called look-ahead effect that spans a maximum of four fluctuations, or a long period that spans, for example, fifty fluctuations. It is not necessary to drive the driving source for fixing the upper liquid crystal display device 3610, and furthermore, it is possible to easily change the original position within that period according to the degree of expectation etc. , It is possible to realize an effect that spans multiple variations using the position of the movable range as the original position.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, until the game machine is used, it can be arranged (for example, laid flat) so that its own weight does not act on the biasing force of the biasing member (horizontal, etc.). , at least until it is used, the deterioration of the biasing function can be suppressed (automatic deterioration suppression function). In this case, the upper liquid crystal driving motor 3415 and the biasing member 3412 are provided so that the biasing force of the biasing member 3412 is greater than the detent torque. When the liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 are arranged (for example, laid flat) so that they do not work (horizontally, etc.), both the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move upward to the upper end of the movable range. As for the specific position (the position moved upward to the upper end) to be positioned by the automatic deterioration suppression function, it is preferable not to adopt the plurality of positions in the movable range as the original position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 move in the vertical direction. As long as the movement component in the vertical direction is included, at least the weight of the liquid crystal display device is generated when it is installed in the hall.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 is positioned at the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 as an example of the liquid crystal, but the present invention is not limited to liquid crystal, and may be, for example, a dot display or an organic EL display. etc., and may be a structure such as an ornament other than the display.

Moreover, the method of urging the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 may be either urging by a pulling force or urging by a pushing force. Further, when the plurality of positions in the movable range are used as the original positions and the movable range is held at any position, a driving force may be applied to cause the movable range to stay at the original position.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is in front of the liquid crystal, the movable decoration portion 3710 behind the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 appears and is positioned in front of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630. made it According to such a configuration, the rear movable decoration part 3710 is displaced further forward than the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 which has been produced in the front row until then, so that the player is not conscious of the production space. The front space, which is not even used by the liquid crystal decoration members 3630 in the front row, is used, and it is possible to realize an unexpected effect of "How far will it come this way?"

Further, in this embodiment, when the movable decoration part 3710 is positioned in front of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, the movable decoration part 3710 performs the performance operation at a position overlapping the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 in a front view. Since the space in the front-rear direction is extremely narrow and limited, it is meaningless unless the relationship between the two arranged in the front-rear direction is grasped when the movable accessories are exchanged in the front-rear direction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the movable decoration part 3710 is positioned on the front side of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, the production operation is performed at a position overlapping the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 in a front view. is clearly recognized by the player, and the production effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction (three-dimensional movable accessory production effect), which cannot be achieved by the liquid crystal display, can be fully exhibited.

In addition, in this embodiment, normally, when the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 performs the performance action in front of the liquid crystal, the movable decoration part 3710 does not perform the performance action. The liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is designed not to perform the performance operation while coming out to the front side. Even if the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 and the movable decorative portion 3710 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, there is a concern that the movable body positioned behind is relatively inconspicuous and the effect of the production is lowered. By performing the action on the front side of the movable body on the side where the body does not perform the performance action, the performance effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction can be maximized.

In this embodiment, as described above, the movable decorative portion 3710 has a narrow movable area behind the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, and extends forward from the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 to widen the movable area. After the movable decoration part 3710 emerges from the narrow movable area, when the movable decoration part 3710 emerges in front of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630, it deforms into a decoration larger than the narrow movable area at the time of emergence. This gives a strong impression of the movement of the moving decorative parts 3710 extending forward and backward to replace each other, so that the effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front and back direction can be further brought out.

In addition, the movable decoration part 3710 has an effect pattern such that it appears to the player at the rear position of the liquid crystal display device and can be visually recognized by the player, but does not appear in front of the liquid crystal display device and becomes invisible again. may As a result, it is possible to give the player a preconceived notion that the movable decorative portion 3710 is on the rear side of the movable body. Due to the preconceived notion that the movable body is on the side, it is possible to give the impression that the movable decorative part 3710 has moved a considerable distance from the back to the front, and further draws out the production effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction. be able to

When the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is on the front side, it moves so as to overlap the movable decorative portion 3710 when viewed from the front. After the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 is moved to a position where it does not overlap the movable decorative portion 3710 when viewed from the front, the movable decorative portion 3710 comes out. Then, the movable decorative part 3710 moves to a position where it overlaps with the front side of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 which has moved to a position where it does not overlap. In order to realize such movement, the space behind the liquid crystal can be saved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 and the movable decorative portion 3710 are interchanged in the depth direction, and the decorative portion protruding to the front performs the performance action. After the 3710 appears in front of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the presentation action of uniting with the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 may be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, after the movable decorative portion 3710 comes out in front of the liquid crystal decorative member 3630, the other movable bodies (face driving portion 3210, shoulder driving portion 3220) also move into the rendering space. It is made to perform a performance action of coming out by using and uniting with the movable decorative portion 3710.例文帳に追加That is, until the movable decoration part 3710 comes forward, the operation is controlled so as not to make the player aware that the space in front of the liquid crystal decoration member 3630 is used for the effect. The player is given a strong impression when the body appears, and it is possible to realize a performance action that further enhances the performance effect of the movable bodies arranged in the front-rear direction.

In this embodiment, both the movable decorative portion 3710 and the liquid crystal decorative member 3630 are moved and exchanged with each other in the depth direction. It can be effective.

[6. Control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to the drawings. The control structure of the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110 and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board for performing game control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described, and then the peripheral control board for performing effect control will be described.

FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the main control board. The main control board 4100 controls the progress of the game, and includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

The main control MPU 4100a is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The ROM stores, for example, a main control program that controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, that is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power is turned on, and that controls game operations.

The main control input circuit 4100b receives detection signals from various detection switches. The main control output circuit 4100c outputs various signals to an external board or the like. The main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d drives various solenoids for movable accessories. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 4100a includes a RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control internal RAM"), a ROM (hereinafter "main control internal ROM"), a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), and a functions are also built in.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information obtained by inputting detection signals from various detection switches to various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 4100b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is composed of a main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function and a main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals. .

The main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals.

On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals from its various output terminals.

A detection signal from the starter switch 3022 and the general prize winning switch 3020 and a signal from the power failure monitor circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. The starting port switch 3022 is a general term for the first starting port switch and the second starting port switch, and detects a game ball entered into each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004c. The general winning opening switch 3020 detects a game ball entering the general winning opening 2104 .

In addition, detection signals from the gate switch 2352, the count switch 2110, and the magnetic detection switch 3024 are input to the main control MPU 4100a through the panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. Input to the input terminal of the port. The gate switch 2352 detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 . The count switch 2110 detects game balls entering the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 . A magnetic detection switch 3024 is attached to the back unit 3000 to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signal from each of these switches. Outputs a control signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starter solenoid (movable piece 2005b drive solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. do.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, thereby outputting the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display. Signals are output to various displays via the board 1191 . Various indicators include a first special symbol display device 1185, a second special symbol display device 1186, a first special symbol storage display device 1184, a second special symbol storage display device 1187, a normal symbol display device 1189, and a normal symbol storage display. A device 1188, a game state indicator 1183, and a round indicator 1190 are included.

In addition, the main control MPU4100a, by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, payout control board from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function Various information (game information) is output to 4110 . Furthermore, by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ).

In the present embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the starter switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110, whereas the general winning switch 3020 , a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004c and frequently passes through the gate, so the start port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 frequently detect the game ball. Occur. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the starting switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 .

In addition, when a jackpot game state (special game state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and game balls enter frequently, so the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. occurs in For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, since game balls do not frequently enter the general winning opening 2001, the detection by the general winning opening switch 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning port switch 3020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of a predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, whereby the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function Various commands are transmitted to 4110 as serial data.

When the payout control board 4110 normally completes receiving various commands as serial data from the main control board 4100, it outputs to the main control board 4100 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. The payer ACK signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data at the main control input circuit 4100b, and the main control input circuit 4100b sends the command to the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal.

When various commands from the payout control board 4110 are successfully received as serial data, the control MPU 4100a transmits a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function. Output to 4100ca. The main payment ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110 from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb to the peripheral control board 4140 .

The power board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during the power-off process even when the power is off.

Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output from the payout control board 4110. The RAM clear signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. The main control MPU 4100a completely erases (clears) the contents of the main control built-in RAM with the input of the RAM clear signal as a trigger.

Next, a peripheral control board for effect control will be described. FIG. 131 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board. The peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control section 4150, a liquid crystal and sound control section 4160, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control section 4165, and a volume control volume 4140a.

The peripheral control unit 4150 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100 . In addition, the input information of the operation of the effect operation means such as the top plate effect button 257 is received to control the effect operation. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 3600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and performs detection control of the contact state of the touch panel 246. It controls sounds such as music and sound effects that are played from the speaker installed on the door frame.

The RTC control unit 4165 is timekeeping means that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second. The volume adjustment volume 4140a adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc., played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by rotating the knob.

Peripheral control unit 4150, which performs effect control, includes peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 4150e"). ) and are provided.

Peripheral control ROM 4150b controls power-on processing that is executed when power is turned on. It also stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on and that controls performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data.

Peripheral control RAM 4150c stores various information (for example, liquid crystal display device Information for managing schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the 3600 and schedule data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc.).

The peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores various types of information (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state, information for managing a special effect flag, etc.) that continues over the course of the day. The peripheral control external WDT 4150e monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally.

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time during which the power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ) cannot retain the stored contents. On the other hand, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as an "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") provided on the power supply board, so that the stored contents are restored by 50%. It can be held for about an hour.

In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided in the power supply board, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko game machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. As a result, peripheral control SRAM 4150d is unable to retain its stored contents and loses its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the reset is applied. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e by outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, and can prevent resetting.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, and the like. Upon receipt of various commands from the main control board 4100, based on the received various commands, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and other boards for effect control are sent control signals. .

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. It is transmitted from the substrate serial I/O port to the lamp driving substrate 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). In addition, game board side motor drive data for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted from the serial I/O port for the motor drive board to the peripheral. It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 via the control output circuit.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs door-side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor provided on the door frame from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral door relay terminal board. Furthermore, the door-side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame is transmitted from the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED serial I/O port. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation portion and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation portion provided in the handle unit 500. is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board. Then, the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral control MPU 4150a through the peripheral door relay terminal board, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral control input circuit. entered in the port.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies (movable accessories) provided on the game board 5, and further from push switches such as production buttons is serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 or the like. The serialized detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7. Various control processing of the main control board]
[7-1. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes the main control program, thereby executing the main control side power-on processing. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the procedure of main control side power-on processing.

When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 4100a first executes an initialization process (step S10). In the initialization process, the execution conditions for the interrupt process are set, and data to be stored in the main control built-in RAM is set according to the activation state of the pachinko game machine 1 .

For example, in the event of a power failure or instantaneous power failure, the data stored in the main control built-in RAM is restored based on the game information backed up in order to restore the state before the power was cut off. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is turned on when the hall is opened (when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated), RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM is executed.

When the initialization process ends, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S11). The power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning when the voltage of the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure and the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage.

The main control MPU 4100a executes a non-win-lose random number update process when the power failure warning signal is not detected (the result of step S11 is "No") (step S12). In the non-hit-lose random number update process, the random numbers irrelevant to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination) are updated. The non-win/lose random numbers include, for example, reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers. After that, the non-hit-lose random number update process is continuously executed until the power failure warning signal is detected.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a detects the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU 4100a executes main control side power-off processing for protecting the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM (step S12). In the main control side power-off process, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited to prevent writing to the main control built-in RAM and protect game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the drive signal output to the starter solenoid 2105, the function display unit, etc. is stopped, a checksum is calculated for judging the validity of the game information at the time of power failure restoration, and a backup flag is set.

The pachinko game machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and after the power is restored, the main control side power-on processing is executed and protected by the main control side power-off processing. The state before the power failure is restored based on the game information.

[7-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. The main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing (FIG. 132).

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a clears the interrupt flag (step S72). The interrupt period is initialized by clearing the interrupt flag, and the next interrupt period is clocked from the initial value.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. For example, a detection signal from the count switch 2110 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2103, a detection signal from the starter switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the starter opening 2101, and cheating using a magnet A detection signal from the magnetism detection switch 3024 for detecting , a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process, etc. are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a performs timer update processing for managing time by subtracting the timer interrupt period (4 ms) from the set measurement time until it becomes 0 (step S76). The measurement time in the timer update process includes, for example, the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, the normal symbol and normal determined by the normal electric auditors control process In addition to the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the symbol variation display pattern, a payout control board 4110 normally receives various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). (ACK signal input determination time) and the like.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes win/lose random number update processing (step S78). In the hit/lose random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit design random number, and the small hit design random number are updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. . Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2103, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or the payout control board 4110 sends the prize ball command. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the reception has been completed normally is not input within a predetermined time, the payout control board 4110 creates a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. or send to

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes frame command reception processing (step S82). Frame command reception processing receives various commands output from the payout control board 4110 .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2103), etc. , create a winning abnormal display command as an abnormal state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the random number for big hit determination matches the big hit determination value ("special lottery"), and whether or not the random number for big hit symbol matches the probability variation determination value. (determine whether or not to generate probability fluctuation). Here, "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of hitting a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). Details of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the normal symbol hit determination random number or the like is extracted. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value ("normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is to be performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left-right direction so that the game ball can be received into the lower start opening 2102, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes port output processing (step S90). In the port output process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control program, for example, based on the output information, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU4100a, when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 has been normally received, the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 4110 output, and when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, and output a drive signal to the starter solenoid 2105 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece 2106 In addition to outputting, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, starting port Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as winning information output signal are output to the payout control board 4110 .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes a command for instructing execution of effects by a liquid crystal display device, a movable accessory, etc., a command for notifying the game state, the occurrence of an error, and the like.

Finally, the main control MPU 4100a switches (restores) the register (step S96), and terminates the main control side timer interrupt processing. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a saves the contents of the general-purpose register to the stack area by means of hardware. This prevents the contents of general-purpose registers used in main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In the process of step S96, the contents saved in the stack area are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets interrupt permission after the process of step S96.

[7-3. Special pattern and special electric accessories control process]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing. The special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the acceptance of the game ball to the start port 2101, that is, triggered by the start winning (satisfaction of the start condition), for each start storage information (start information) where this start condition is met A random number for judging a big hit is obtained, and it is judged whether or not the random number for judging a big hit coincides with a judging value for a big hit pre-stored in a main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (special game state) based on the lottery result, and if the jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met). ), the normal game state is shifted to the jackpot game state. The procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric role product control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball wins in the big winning hole (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a big winning hole winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting winning hole (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting winning opening is determined by reading the presence or absence of the detection signal from the starting opening switch 3022 in the switch input processing (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 133). This is done based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 4100a, when the game ball has won the starting hole 2101 (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the start-up win-time process, a start-up win-win command to be transmitted when a game ball newly wins in the start-up win is set, a random number for judging a big hit is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special pattern is set. It also executes processing and the like for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes corresponding processing based on the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number, which is a game progress state variable specifying the type of branch processing executed according to the progress of the game (step S124). The game progress state variables are stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and are updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area. End the process. Since the values of the game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, they are backed up in the main control side power failure process.

In the processing of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as branch processing, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation in-process (step S132), special symbol big hit determination processing (step S134), Special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before large winning opening opening (step S140), large winning opening opening processing (step S142), large winning opening closing process (step S144) or a special winning opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), based on the fact that the game ball enters the starting winning hole, the special symbol display device starts to display the variation of the special symbol.

In the special symbol fluctuation process (step S132), a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol and the like are performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the fixed and stopped special symbol generates a big win game state based on the game ball entering the starting winning hole.

In the special symbol deviation stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and notifying that effect is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big win game state and notifying that a big win operation is started is performed. In the big winning hole opening process (step S142), by opening the opening/closing member from the closed state, a process related to the big winning action to make it easier for the game ball to enter each big winning hole is performed.

In the large winning opening closing process (step S144), by closing the opening/closing member from the opened state, a process related to the big winning operation to make it difficult for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is over, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

[7-4. Special symbol variation waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not performed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparations are made to start the special symbol variation display.

The main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol operation pending balls is not zero. It should be noted that the number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored for each starting winning opening when a plurality of starting winning openings are provided. When the variation of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbols is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 4100a sets a pending ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on the random number for judging the big hit acquired at the time of winning the starting game.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 4100 a creates a variation pattern command for transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 . Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the variation type classification value is acquired from the variation type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type classification value to the command value set in step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command thus created is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (step S466). Further, the change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[7-5. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting the variation pattern in the special symbol variation display. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 4100a first acquires the number of special symbol operation pending balls (step S530). The number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a special symbol variation pattern based on the number of special symbol operation pending balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is retrieved from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 4100a executes variation type determination processing for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbols (step S548). The variation type classification value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a searches the variable time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of times of pseudo consecutive. Then, the main control MPU 4100a adds the variable time added value retrieved in the process of step S552 to the standard variable time value retrieved in the process of step S546 to obtain the final variable time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[7-6. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern selection determination processing. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 4100a first acquires the variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The variation information source table includes hit (hit variation selection information state table), loss (loss variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are stored in table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a obtains a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). When a big win is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big win flag and a big win symbol type are obtained (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a executes variation information number search processing based on the jackpot flag and jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 4100a acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 4100a does not win a big win or a small win (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to generate reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372).

The main control MPU 4100a acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the lost variation selection information retention table based on the number of retained balls when the reach is not generated in the variation display (the result of step S372 is "no") (step S376).

On the other hand, the main control MPU 4100a acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag when the reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes"). (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes variation information number search processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the processing of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the variation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Furthermore, based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table, variation information number search processing is executed (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two steps using two types of random numbers, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, based on the variation pattern random number 1, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ system reach) is selected. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally displayed in a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2 . It should be noted that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, and a method of drawing lots in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one variation pattern random number.

[8. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, processing of the peripheral control board 4140 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing when the peripheral controller power is turned on. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

[8-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 executes a performance control program to perform a peripheral control unit power-on process. The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an initial setting process when the peripheral control unit power-on process is started (step S1000). In the initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, and the like are performed.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs processing to initialize itself, but the time required for the processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be done. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect and the pachinko game output from the main control board 4100 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a to write, for example, "0" to the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes current time information acquisition processing in the effect control program (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165, and the RTC information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is acquired. 4150 cad is set in the calendar information storage section as the current calendar information and set in the time information storage section as the current time information.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. Each is set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. A value of 1 is set in blank signal interrupt processing.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed (the result of step S1008 is "YES"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing (FIG. 139).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes lamp data output processing (step S1012). In the lamp data output process, for example, a game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, which is created by the lamp data creation process. Output side emission data.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In the operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later, based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit, each operation means is monitored for operation or not, Whether or not to be reflected in the game performance is determined as appropriate.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes display data output processing (step S1016). In the display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated in the built-in VRAM of the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source in the display data creation process is output by the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device. H.244 output.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs the music and sound effects created in the sound data creation process, and further, the sound data such as the notification sound and notification sound as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes scheduler update processing (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, the schedule data that instructs the timing of outputting the screen data, the light emission data, the sound data, the driving data of the movable accessory, etc., is updated. For example, the pointer is updated in order to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is to be output to the built-in tone generator VDP 4160a.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes received command analysis processing (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are analyzed (command analysis means) received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception means). The game state is recognized according to the analysis result of the received command, and the corresponding performance is executed. Also, in the received command analysis process, a character product group initialization operation command process is executed. In the role product group initialization operation command process, processing relating to the initialization operation of the role product is performed, and the initialization operation is performed for each role product group. Details of the character product group initialization operation command process will be described using FIG.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes warning processing (step S1024). In the warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, screen generation schedule data and lighting mode generation for executing various abnormality notifications are performed. schedule data for sound generation, schedule data for electric driving source, etc. are set. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes RTC acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 are updated. The RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, and also updates the year, month, day, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards is created.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, screen data to be output to the liquid crystal display device is created. When the created screen data is input, the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and converts the extracted at least one character data into sprite data. , and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b are extracted, and the built-in sound source is controlled to generate music and effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Sound data such as sound is incorporated, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes backup processing (step S1034). In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c are copied to the backup area and backed up.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes WDT clear processing (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control units (step S1038), and returns to the processing of step S1006. Then, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is executed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the V blank signal is input. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[8-2. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42 will be described. .

When the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral controller MPU 4150a first determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 42) and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing being this routine being executed. A counter that counts the number of times In this embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms. After starting the interrupt timer, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

If the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100 (result of step S1100 is "NO"), that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. In this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a terminates the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing as it is.

On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (result of step S1100 is "YES"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. This means that the number of times of

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and motors of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order. Drives an electrical drive source such as a solenoid.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In the movable body information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information, movement position history information, etc.). From the created history information, the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In the operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit are input or not, thereby obtaining history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, information of the pressing operation unit 405). operation history information, etc.). Whether or not the pressing operation unit 405 is operated can be obtained from this history information.

Finally, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes drawing state acquisition processing (S1110). Furthermore, backup processing is executed (step S1112), and this processing ends. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c are copied to the backup area and backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effect in steps S1104 to S1108 during the 1 ms period. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effect in steps S1012 to S1032 in a period of about 33.3 ms. Also, as described above, by counting the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN while the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed once, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is controlled so that it is not executed more than 33 times. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires information (jackpot determination result, current progress of the game, etc.) about the game from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) while such processing progresses, and Various effects are controlled based on the acquired information. As control related to these effects, in the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620, a production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time determined by the main control board 4100 appears, and special special effects are displayed during the jackpot game. In addition to making effect images appear, any of various decorations arranged on the game board 5 including the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 (or a plurality of suitable decorations) ), and making any one of these decorations (or a plurality of suitable decorations) emit light.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment displays a specific effect image across the two display surfaces on the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 as one of the controls related to various effects. It is also possible to perform control to cause different effect images to appear on the two display surfaces, respectively.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this embodiment executes the above-mentioned specific movable effect as one of the controls related to various effects, and during the period during which the specific movable effect is performed, various decorations are displayed. The movable decorative portion 3710, which is one of them, can be made to emit light.

Also, the movable decorative portion 3710 may be provided integrally with the liquid crystal display device 3600 .

[8-3. Accessory initialization process]
Next, the initialization process for returning the accessory to the initial position will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 executes the initialization processing of the role product. In the initialization process of this embodiment, a plurality of accessories provided in the gaming machine (game board 5, outer frame 2) are grouped, and an initialization operation is performed to return the accessories to their initial positions for each group.

First, the concept of groups of characters will be explained. As described above, the groups of role items defined in the gaming machine of this embodiment include one or more role items in each group, and the one or more groups include a plurality of role items. ing. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing the concept of the group of characters in the gaming machine of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 140, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the accessories are divided into five groups. The character group 01 includes a full burst character 3230, left combination drive characters 3710a, b, right combination drive characters 3710c, d, left and right combination storage-appearance characters 3740L, R, upper liquid crystal drive character 3410, and lower liquid crystal. Contains the six roles of the driving role 3440 . The character group 02 includes a right arm character 3220a, the character group 03 includes a left arm character 3220b, the character group 04 includes a face character 3210, and the character group 05 includes a door lower right direction character (button unit). 220C.

These character groups are defined so that physically interfering characters are included in the same group. In other words, if the character object is stopped at an unintended location for some reason, the initialization operation to return to the initial position is performed, but the character object during the initialization operation physically interferes with other characters, It may not be possible to return to the initial position. Therefore, the characters that physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group, and the characters in the group are operated in a predetermined sequence to perform the initialization operation. return.

Further, as will be described later according to the flow chart, when one role object in the same group is determined to be abnormal, the actions of all the role objects in the group are stopped. Furthermore, the character initialization operation operates not only the character that is determined to be abnormal (not stopped at the initial position), but also all the characters in the group to operate in a predetermined sequence. (not stopped at the position) is restored to the initial position.

Furthermore, the character initialization operation is performed for each group in consideration of the upper limit of the current that can be used for the operation of the character. A plurality of groups of character objects may be initialized simultaneously as long as the upper limit of current is not exceeded.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a role product group initialization operation management table.

The character object group initialization operation management table includes data used when performing the character object initialization operation, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, which is a non-volatile storage area of the peripheral control unit 4150. FIG. The role product group initialization operation management table includes role product name (photo name), photo number, role product group error flag number, photo error counter number, role product group initialization operation scheduler data number, and role product group initialization operation status. Includes number, role product group initialization operation scheduler data execution time, jackpot confirmed role product identifier, and logic value at photo detection.

The role product group initialization operation management table is accessed by a role product group initialization operation management data access index. That is, the character product group initialization operation management data access index is the row number in which the data is stored in the character product group initialization operation management table.

The photo number is an identification number for uniquely identifying the role object detection photosensor for detecting the position of the role object. The role object detection photosensor is a sensor provided for each role object driving motor that detects whether or not the position of the role object is the initial position, and is, for example, the rotation detection sensor 278 shown in FIG. In addition, other role objects are also provided with role object detection photosensors for each motor. Therefore, the motor for driving the accessory and the accessory driven by the motor can be identified by the photo number. In this embodiment, a photosensor is exemplified as a sensor for detecting the position of the character object, but other sensors (for example, a magnetic sensor, etc.) may be used.

The role object group error flag number is a number that uniquely identifies the error flag number in which the abnormal condition (not stopped at the initial position) of the role object determined by the output logic of the role object detection photosensor is stored. , is defined for each character group to which the character belongs. Also, the role product group error flag number includes the group number. The group number may be defined according to the priority of initialization operations. For example, when an abnormality is detected in a plurality of character product groups at the same time, the initialization operation is performed first for the character product group with the smallest group number. Specifically, when an abnormality is detected in the role product group error flag numbers "_G1_ERRFG" and "_G2_ERRFG", the role product group G1 performs the initialization operation first, and then the role product group G2 performs the initialization operation. I do. By defining the accessory group initialization operation management data in ascending order of the group number in the accessory group initialization operation management table, when an abnormality occurs in a plurality of accessory groups, the accessory group with the smallest group number Whether the initialization operation is necessary or not is determined, and the initialization operation of the character object group with the higher priority is executed first. As a result, for example, by executing the initialization operation first for the character object that appears in front of the liquid crystal display device 3600, for example, the character object group that affects the game in order to hide the screen of the liquid crystal display device 3600 is displayed first. Initialization operation can be performed at

The role product group error flag indicated by the role product group error flag number is set to ON when at least one role product belonging to the relevant role product group is abnormal (not stopped at the initial position).

The photo error counter number is an identification number for uniquely identifying the photo error counter, and is defined for each character object detection photosensor. In addition, the photo error counter indicated by the photo error counter number is stored in the photo information work area which is the storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and in a predetermined state (for example, before the start of the special symbol variation display), the character object detection photosensor , and if it is not the logic of the initial position, it is recorded as abnormal.

The role product group initialization operation scheduler data number is a number for uniquely identifying the scheduler data set in the motor system scheduler to perform the initialization operation of the role product included in the role product group. Defined for each entity group. The scheduler data is data in which the driving pattern of the accessory (that is, the accessory-driving motor) is defined. By setting the scheduler data in the motor system scheduler, the motor system scheduler is activated and the scheduler data defines The accessory drive motor operates in the same pattern.

The character product group initialization operation status number is stored in the photo information work area, which is a storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is a number for uniquely identifying the status storage area that manages the status of the initialization operation of the character product group. Yes, for example, indicates a state such as not in initialization operation, initialization operation start, initialization operation in progress. The role product group initialization operation scheduler data execution time is the total value of the execution time of the role product group initialization operation scheduler data for initializing the roles included in the role product group.

The jackpot confirmed accessory identifier is an identifier that indicates whether or not the accessory represents the result of a big win lottery. ” indicates that the relevant accessory is an accessory representing the winning or losing of a big hit. The logic value at the time of photo detection is a logical value when the character object detection photosensor detects the character object (that is, the character object detection photosensor is shielded by the character object), and indicates that the character object is in the initial position. A signal from the role object detection photosensor is a logical value taken into the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 when the role object detection photosensor is detecting. The signal output from the role object detection photosensor may pass through several logic circuits before reaching the peripheral control MPU 4150a. may or may not have the same logic.

FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an example of character product group initialization operation command processing.

In the following description, it is assumed that the accessory is driven by a stepping motor, but the present invention can also be applied to an accessory that is driven by a solenoid that reciprocates within a predetermined positional range. In addition, although the accessory performs reciprocating motion with a stepping motor or solenoid, it is also possible to perform only one-directional motion (returning motion or projecting motion) with a stepping motor or solenoid, and motion in the other direction by gravity or spring force. good.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 executes the character product group initialization operation command process. As described above, the character product group initialization operation command process is called and executed from the received command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 138) of the peripheral control unit power-on process.

First, the power-on/RAM clear initialization operation execution timer is referred to, and if the timer has not timed up to 0 and is in operation, the timer value is decremented by 1 (S1201). The power-on/RAM clear initialization operation in-execution timer is set for the execution time of the motor initialization operation when the RAM is cleared or when the power is turned on. do. When the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation executing timer times out, the power-on/RAM clear initialization operation execution flag is set to OFF, and all the character groups can start the initialization operation and the performance operation.

Next, the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer for all the role product groups is referred to, and if the timer is 0 and has not expired, the timer value is decremented by 1 (S1202). The role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer is set with the initialization operation time of the role product group, and is timed out when the initialization operation is completed. Also, when the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer times out, the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition flag is set to OFF, and the role product group initialization operation status number is changed to a number indicating that initialization is not being performed, If the other role object groups are not abnormal, all the role objects can start the initialization operation and the performance operation.

After that, it is determined whether the received command is the command sent by the main control board 4100 (S1203). If the received command is not the command sent by the main control board 4100 (for example, if it is a command issued within the peripheral control board 4140), each operation judgment of the initialization operation according to the game state of the main control board 4100 and action, the character object group initialization action command process is terminated, and the process of the calling source is returned to.

On the other hand, if the received command is the command sent by the main control board 4100, it is determined whether the received command is the leading data of a series of commands (S1204). Here, a series of commands is data from leading data (header) indicating the beginning of the series of commands to predetermined data (trailer) indicating the end of the series of commands. Special symbol fluctuation time state commands and accompanying control data are included. The reason for determining whether it is the head of a series of commands is that a series of commands are internally issued within the peripheral control program at each processing cycle of the peripheral control program. to do

If the received command is the head data of a series of commands, the character product group initialization operation main process is executed (S1210). Details of the character object group initialization operation main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 143A, 143B, 147A and 147B. As will be described later, the character product group initialization operation main processing includes single initialization operation processing (FIGS. 143A and 143B) and simultaneous initialization operation processing (FIGS. 147A and 147B). In some cases, simultaneous initialization operation processing may be implemented instead of single initialization operation processing.

On the other hand, if the received command is not the head data of a series of commands, it is determined whether the received command is a special symbol variation state command (S1205). If the received command is the state command at the time of special symbol variation, there is a possibility that the role product will perform an effect operation accompanying the special symbol variation display, so the role product group initialization operation start determination process is executed (S1260), Furthermore, a character product group initialization operation end determination process is executed (S1290). By calling the initialization operation start determination process at the start of the special symbol variation display, it is judged whether the character is at the initial position before starting the production operation of the character, and if it is not at the initial position, the production operation is prohibited. initialization process can be performed. Details of the character product group initialization operation start determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 144A and 144B, and details of the character product group initialization operation end determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the received command is not the special symbol variation state command, it is determined whether the received command is a predetermined command that changes the state of the gaming machine (S1206). The predetermined commands are, for example, special figure 1, 2 pattern confirmation command, jackpot opening command, jackpot ending command, jackpot opening command, demonstration start command, demonstration end command, door opening command, door closing command, abnormality notification command. However, other commands that change the state of the gaming machine may be used. If the received command is the above-described predetermined command, the character product group initialization operation end determination process is executed (S1290). Details of the character product group initialization operation end determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 145 . The initialization operation end process is also executed at the start of special symbol variation display by steps S1205, S1260, and S1290. This is to enable the character product production operation during the fluctuation when the initialization process is finished by determining the end of the initialization operation at the start of the special symbol fluctuation.

On the other hand, if the received command is not the above-described predetermined command, it is determined whether the received command is a RAM clear command or a power-on command (S1207). If the received command is a RAM clear command or a power-on command, the RAM clear/power-on motor initialization process is executed (S1300), and the RAM clear/power-on motor initialization operation start process is executed ( S1310). The details of the RAM clear/power-on motor initialization process will be described with reference to FIG. 146A, and the details of the RAM clear/power-on motor initialization operation activation process will be described with reference to FIG. 146B.

On the other hand, if the received command is neither the RAM clear command nor the power-on command, the character product group initialization operation command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the calling source.

143A and 143B are flowcharts showing single initialization operation processing, which is an example of the character product group initialization operation main processing (S1210).

First, with reference to the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation execution flag, it is determined whether the initialization operation is being performed when the RAM is cleared or the initialization operation is being performed when the power is turned on (S1211). Then, if the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution flag is ON, it means that the initialization operation is being performed when the RAM is cleared or the initialization operation is being performed when the power is turned on, so that the main processing of the accessory group initialization operation is terminated, Return to the calling process.

On the other hand, if the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution flag is OFF, it is neither during the initialization operation at the time of RAM clearing nor during the initialization operation at the time of power-on, so all the role product group error flags are determined, and The motor system scheduler activates the motor scheduler data for releasing the excitation of all the motors belonging to the role product group with the role product group error flag whose value is ON (S1212). Furthermore, in step S1212, the character product group error flag that was ON is set to OFF. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the role product group error flag is ON, in the role product group initialization operation start determination process (S1260), the initialization operation to the role product group initialization operation status starts from the group with the highest priority. Since the start is set, the character object group initialization operation main process is started. Then, by the process of step S1212, the scheduler data for releasing the excitation of the motor of the accessory group is activated by the motor system scheduler with the highest priority, and the motor system scheduler with the higher priority continues to release the excitation of the motor. Even if the schedule data for operating the stopped motor is executed by the scheduler, all the accessories belonging to the error target accessory group continue to stop until the power is turned on again.

Next, all photo information work areas are referred to, and it is determined whether bits corresponding to all photo numbers whose initial positions must be confirmed are ON (initial positions). It is determined whether or not all photo information indicates that there is (S1213). If all the character objects are in the correct initial positions, none of the character objects need to be initialized. Therefore, the character object group initialization operation main process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if at least one character object is not in the correct initial position, the character object group initialization operation management data access index is set to 0 in order to access the character object group initialization operation management data from the first line ( S1214). In the accessory group initialization operation main processing, the accessory group initialization operation management data is accessed in order from the row with the smallest number. The necessity of the initialization operation is determined from , and the initialization operation is performed first for the character object group with the highest priority.

Then, the photo number is obtained from the row of the role product group initialization operation management table indicated by the index for access to the role product group initialization operation management data access (S1215).

Then, by referring to the role product group initialization operation scheduler data number in the relevant row of the role product group initialization operation management table, it is determined whether or not the role product detection photosensor is related to the motor initialization operation. Determine (S1216). Specifically, the role product detection photosensor for which the role product group initialization operation scheduler data number is defined is the photosensor on the initial position side, and therefore is the target of the initialization operation. On the other hand, the character object detection photosensor whose character object group initialization operation scheduler data number is "_UNUSED" detects a movable position (end or intermediate position) that is not the initial position among the plurality of photosensors used for the character object. Since it is a photosensor, the scheduler for the initialization operation is not prepared, and it is not the target of the initialization operation.

As a result of the determination, if the photo sensor is not for the motor to be initialized, the process proceeds to step S1218. On the other hand, if the photo sensor is for the motor to be initialized, it is determined whether the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is in the process of initialization (S1217). For example, if the character object group initialization operation status number indicates that something other than the initialization operation is not being performed, the initialization operation is being performed.

As a result of determination in step S1217, if the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is in initialization operation, the process proceeds to step S1226 (FIG. 143B). On the other hand, if the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is not in the initializing operation, the index for access to accessory group initialization operation management data is incremented by 1, and the number of data (rows) in the accessory group initialization operation management table is changed. number) is exceeded (S1218).

As a result, if it is equal to or less than the number of data (rows) in the role product group initialization operation management table, there is data in the role product group initialization operation management table for which the judgment as to whether it is the initialization operation start timing has not been completed. , the process returns to step S1215 to repeat the process.

On the other hand, if the number of data (number of rows) of the role product group initialization operation management table is exceeded, the start timing of the initialization operation has been determined for all the data in the role product group initialization operation management table. , to access the role product group initialization operation management data from the first line, count abnormalities in the output of the role product detection photosensor, and add the photo error counter. The index is set to 0 (S1219).

A photo number corresponding to the index is obtained from the character product group initialization operation management data (S1220).

Then, by referring to the role product group initialization operation scheduler data number of the row in the role product group initialization operation management table, it is determined whether or not the role product detection photosensor is related to the motor initialization operation ( S1221). The method of determining whether the object is the target of the initialization operation is the same as the method described above in step S1216.

As a result of the determination, if the motor is not the target of the initialization operation, the process proceeds to step S1224. On the other hand, if it is a character object detection photosensor for the motor to be initialized, the bit of the character object detection photosensor of the photo number in the all photo information work area is referred to, and the output logic of the character object detection photosensor is set to the initial position. is detected (S1222). Specifically, when the bit of the character object detecting photosensor of the photo number in the photo information work area is set, it is determined that the output logic of the character object detecting photosensor indicates the initial position. . The bit of the photo information work area is set to ON in step S1278 of the character product group initialization operation start determination process (FIG. 144B).

As a result of the determination, if the output logic of the accessory detection photosensor indicates the initial position, the process proceeds to step S1224. On the other hand, if the output logic of the role product detection photosensor does not indicate the initial position, the photo error counter number in the role product group initialization operation management table is referred to, the photo error counter corresponding to the photo number is identified, and the photo error The counter is incremented by 1 (S1223).

Then, the index for access to the character product group initialization operation management data access is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether the number of data (the number of rows) of the character product group initialization operation management table is exceeded (S1224).

As a result, if it is smaller than the number of data (number of rows) in the role product group initialization operation management table, there is data in the role product group initialization operation management table for which addition processing of the photo error counter has not been completed, so the process returns to step S1220. , the process is repeated.

On the other hand, if the number of data (the number of rows) in the role product group initialization operation management table is exceeded, the addition processing of the photo error counter has been completed for all the data in the role product group initialization operation management table. All photo information work areas are initialized so that the character object detection photosensor is in a normal (initial position) state (S1225).

Next, the processing of steps S1226 to S1231 will be described with reference to FIG. 143B. If the result of determination in step S1217 is that the role product group initialization operation status of the photo number is being initialized, in step S1226 it is checked whether the role product group initialization operation status of the photo number is starting initialization. judge. As a result, if the character product group initialization operation status of the photo number is not the start of initialization, it is not the timing to start the initialization operation of the character product of the photo number, so the main processing of the character product group initialization operation is terminated. and return to the calling process. On the other hand, if the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is initialization start, the accessory group of the photo number starts the initialization operation, so the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is initialized. The data being converted is set (S1227).

Then, the scheduler data corresponding to the role product group initialization operation scheduler data number in the role product group initialization operation management table indicated by the index for access to the role product group initialization operation management data access is activated by the motor system scheduler (S1228). ). As a result, the motors are driven according to the definition by the scheduler data, and the role objects defined in the groups in consideration of the interference between the role objects perform the initialization operation.

Next, the execution time of the role product group initialization operation scheduler data in the role product group initialization operation management data indicated by the index for access to the role product group initialization operation management data is set to all the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timers. (S1229). As a result, until the overwrite prohibition timer of the role product group scheduler expires to 0, the initialization operation and performance operation of the role product of the other role product group are not executed (see S1292 to S1293 in FIG. 145).

Next, the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition flags of all the role product groups are set to ON (S1230). When the role object group scheduler overwrite prohibition flag is set to ON, the operation request of the new scheduler data is ignored, and the initialization operation and performance operation of the other role object groups are not executed. In this way, the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition flag is controlled in conjunction with the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer (the flag is OFF when the timer is 0, and the flag is ON when the timer is not 0).

Then, the operations of all motor system schedulers other than the motor system scheduler 0 that started the initialization operation are stopped (S1231). After that, the character product group initialization operation main process is ended, and the process of the calling source is returned to.

144A and 144B are flowcharts showing an example of the character product group initialization operation start determination process (S1260).

First, with reference to the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution flag, it is determined whether the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution flag is ON (S1261). As a result, if the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution flag is ON, the power-on/RAM clear initialization operation is in progress. back to

On the other hand, if the power-on/RAM-clearing initialization operation in-execution flag is OFF, the character product group initialization operation status number in the character product group initialization operation management table is referred to, and there is a character product group that is being initialized. (S1262). As a result, if any of the character product group initialization operation status numbers indicates that the initialization operation is in progress, the corresponding character product group is being initialized, and the initialization operation of other character product groups cannot be started. Therefore, the character product group initialization operation start determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller.

On the other hand, if none of the character product group initialization operation status numbers indicates that the initialization operation is in progress, the character product group initialization operation management data access The index is set to 0 (S1263).

Then, the photo number is obtained from the row of the role product group initialization operation management table indicated by the index for access to the role product group initialization operation management data access (S1264).

Then, by referring to the role product group initialization operation scheduler data number in the relevant row of the role product group initialization operation management table, it is determined whether or not the role product detection photosensor is related to the motor initialization operation. Determine (S1265). Specifically, the role product detecting photosensor for which the role product group initialization operation scheduler data number is defined is the role product detecting photosensor on the initial position side, so it is subject to the initialization operation. On the other hand, the character object detecting photosensor whose character object group initialization operation scheduler data number is "_UNUSED" is a movable position (end or intermediate position) that is not the initial position among the plurality of character object detecting photosensors used for the character object. , the scheduler data for the initialization operation is not prepared and is not subject to the initialization operation.

As a result of the determination, if the photo sensor is not for the motor to be initialized, the process proceeds to step S1271. On the other hand, if the photo sensor is for the motor to be initialized, it is determined whether the error counter value of the photo number is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (5 in this embodiment) (S1266).

As a result, if the error counter value is smaller than the predetermined threshold value, the process proceeds to step S1271. On the other hand, if the error counter value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value, the error is continuously detected for the predetermined number of times in the relevant role product detection photosensor, so the role product group error flag of the role product detection photosensor of the photo number is already ON (S1267).

If the role product group error flag of the role product detection photosensor of the photo number is ON, the process for initializing the role product of the photo number has already been executed, so the process proceeds to step S1271. On the other hand, if the role product group error flag of the role product detection photosensor of the photo number is OFF, it is the timing at which a predetermined number of consecutive errors have been detected, and for the initialization operation of the role product of the photo number. is not executed, it is determined whether or not the accessory detected by the accessory detection photosensor of the photo number is a big hit confirmed accessory (S1268).

If the accessory detected by the accessory detection photosensor of the photo number is not a big hit confirmed accessory, the process proceeds to step S1270. On the other hand, if the accessory detected by the accessory detection photosensor of the photo number is a confirmed jackpot accessory, an accessory abnormality display command is issued to notify the player of the abnormality of the accessory (S1269). ). By displaying on the liquid crystal display device 3600 that there is an abnormality in the accessory for finalizing the big win, it is possible to inform the people involved in the hall that the accessory important for playing the game is out of order. In addition, the accessory abnormality display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 3600 continues to be displayed until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on again.

After that, the role product group error flag of the role product detection photosensor of the photo number is set to ON (S1270).

Then, the index for access to the character product group initialization operation management data access is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether the number of data (the number of rows) of the character product group initialization operation management table is exceeded (S1271).

As a result, if it is smaller than the number of data (the number of rows) in the role product group initialization operation management table, there is data in the role product group initialization operation management table for which the judgment as to whether it is the timing for starting the initialization of the role product group has not been completed. Therefore, the process returns to step S1264 to repeat the process.

On the other hand, if the number of data (number of rows) of the role product group initialization operation management table is exceeded, it is determined whether it is the role product group initialization start timing for all the data of the role product group initialization operation management table. Since it is finished, all the photo information work areas are initialized so that all the character object detection photosensors are in a normal state (initial position) (S1272).

After that, in order to access the character product group initialization operation management data from the first line, the index for access to the character product group initialization operation management data is set to 0 (S1273).

Then, the photo number is obtained from the row of the role product group initialization operation management table indicated by the index for access to the role product group initialization operation management data access (S1274).

Then, by referring to the role product group initialization operation scheduler data number of the row in the role product group initialization operation management table, it is determined whether or not the role product detection photosensor is related to the motor initialization operation ( S1275). The method of determining whether the object is the target of the initialization operation is the same as the method described above in step S1265. As a result of determination, if it is not the accessory detection photosensor for the motor to be initialized, the process proceeds to step S1281. On the other hand, if it is the role product detection photosensor for the motor to be initialized, it is determined whether the role product group error flag of the photo number is OFF (S1276).

If the accessory group error flag of the photo number is ON, an abnormality (not the initial position) is detected in any of the accessories of the group, so the process proceeds to step S1281. On the other hand, if the role product group error flag of the photo number is OFF, it is determined whether the initial position of the role product detection photosensor of the photo number has been detected (S1277). Specifically, the output logic of the role object detection photosensor is directly determined, and it is determined that detection is possible when the output logic is the initial position.

As a result, if the accessory detection photosensor of the photo number can detect the initial position, the accessory is stopped at the initial position, so the error counter of the accessory detection photosensor of the photo number is set to 0. Set (S1280) and proceed to step S1281. On the other hand, if the character object detection photosensor of the photo number cannot detect the initial position, the bit of the all photo information work area corresponding to the photo number of the character object detection photosensor that has detected an abnormality (not the initial position) is set to ON (S1278). Then, the start of the initialization operation is set in the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number (S1279).

The character product group initialization operation start determination process is called when the command received by the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100 is the special symbol variation time state command, as described above. That is, when the special symbol variation start command is received, the special symbol is not changed and the performance by the character is not performed, so all the characters should be stopped at the initial position. Therefore, in the role product group initialization operation start determination process, the output logic of all the role product detection photosensors is checked (S1277), and the output state of the role product detection photosensors is saved in the all photo information work area ( S1278).

Then, the index for access to the character product group initialization operation management data access is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether the number of data (the number of rows) of the character product group initialization operation management table is exceeded (S1281).

As a result, if the number of data (rows) is smaller than the number of data (number of rows) of the role product group initialization operation management table, there is a role product detection photosensor for which the initial position detection process has not been completed, so the process returns to step S1274 and repeats the process.

On the other hand, if the number of data (number of rows) of the character product group initialization operation management table is exceeded, the initial position detection processing for all the character product detection photosensors is completed, so the character product group initialization operation start determination processing is performed. and return to the calling process.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing an example of the character product group initialization operation end determination process (S1290).

First, the first character object group number (for example, the minimum value) is set as a parameter and written in the memory (S1291). Then, it is determined whether or not the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer of the role product group has reached 0 (S1292). As a result, if the overwrite prohibition timer for the role product group scheduler has not timed out, the initialization operation for the role product has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S1294. On the other hand, if the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer has timed out, it means that the initialization operation of the role product has finished, so the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition flag of the role product group number is set to OFF. , to initialize the role product group initialization operation status number (S1293).

Then, the character object group number, which is a parameter, is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the last character object group number has been exceeded (S1294).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-on/RAM clear initialization operation execution timer has timed up to 0 (S1295). Then, if the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution timer has timed out, the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution flag is set to OFF (S1296), and the accessory group initialization operation end determination processing is performed. and return to the calling process. On the other hand, if the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution timer has not timed out, the initialization operation at the time of power-on/RAM clear has not ended, so the accessory group initialization operation end determination processing ends. , return to the calling process.

In this way, by the character product group initialization operation end determination processing, it is determined whether the initialization processing of the character product group has been completed, and the flag and status number indicating that the initialization operation processing is being executed are updated. Therefore, whether or not the character object group is being initialized can be known in another process.

FIG. 146A is a flowchart showing an example of motor initialization processing (S1300) during RAM clear/power-on.

First, the photo error counters of all the role object detection photosensors are set to 0 (S1301). After that, the role product group error flag, role product group initialization operation status number, role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition flag, and role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer of all the role product groups are initialized (S1302). After that, the RAM clear/power-on motor initialization process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling process.

FIG. 146B is a flow chart showing an example of the motor initialization operation activation process (S1310) when RAM is cleared/when power is turned on.

First, it is determined whether the received command is a RAM clear command (S1311). Since the RAM clear/power-on motor initialization operation processing is executed when a RAM clear command or a power-on command is received, if the received command is not a RAM clear command, the received command is a power-on command. .

If the received command is a power-on command, the motor system scheduler 0 activates the operation scheduler data for power-on initialization (S1312), and sets the execution time of the operation scheduler data for power-on initialization to power-on/RAM clear initialization. A timer is set during execution of the conversion operation (S1313).

On the other hand, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the operation scheduler data for RAM clear initialization is activated by the motor system scheduler 0 (S1314), and when the RAM is cleared, the power is turned on and the RAM is cleared during the execution time of the operation scheduler data for initialization. The initialization operation execution timer is set (S1315).

Thereafter, the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation in-execution flag is set to ON (S1316), the RAM-clear/power-on motor initialization operation activation process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling process.

In this way, when the RAM is cleared or when the power is turned on, the RAM clear/power on motor initialization process is executed, so that the accessory can be returned to the initial position at the timing of initializing the gaming machine.

147A and 147B are flowcharts of simultaneous initialization operation processing, which is a modification of the character product group initialization operation main processing (S1210). In the character product group initialization operation main processing (single initialization operation processing) shown in FIGS. 143A and 143B, the initialization operation was performed for each character product group, but the character product group initialization operation shown in FIGS. 147A and 147B In the main process (simultaneous initialization operation process), character object initialization operations for a plurality of groups are simultaneously performed within a range not exceeding the upper limit of the current that can be used for the operation of the character object.

First, with reference to the power-on/RAM-clear initialization operation execution flag, it is determined whether the initialization operation at the time of RAM clearing or the restoration operation at power-on is in progress (S1211). The processing from steps S1211 to S1216 is the same as the processing (FIG. 143A) at the time of the unit initialization operation described above, so the description is omitted.

In step 1217, it is determined whether or not the character object group initialization operation status of the photo number is being initialized. For example, if the character object group initialization operation status number indicates that something other than the initialization operation is not being performed, the initialization operation is being performed.

If the result of determination in step S1217 is that the role product group initialization operation status of the photo number is being initialized, a role product group simultaneous initialization operation determination execution process (S1240) is executed. Details of the character product group simultaneous initialization action determination execution process will be described using FIG. 148 .

On the other hand, if the character product group initialization operation status of the photo number is not in the initializing operation, the index for accessing the character product group initialization operation management data is incremented by 1, and the number of data in the character product group initialization operation management table ( number of lines) is exceeded (S1218).

As a result, if it is smaller than the number of data (the number of rows) in the role product group initialization operation management table, there is data in the role product group initialization operation management table for which the determination as to whether it is the initialization start timing has not been completed. Returning to S1215, the processing is repeated.

On the other hand, if the number of data (the number of rows) of the role product group initialization operation management table is exceeded, it means that the determination of whether or not it is time to start initialization has been completed for all the data in the role product group initialization operation management table. , the initialization operation statuses of all the character product groups are referred to, and it is determined whether or not there is a character product group currently being initialized (S1235).

As a result, if there is a character object group that is currently being initialized, it means that the character object is in operation and the timing is such that the character object detection photosensor cannot be determined to be normal (initial position), so an error in the character object detection photosensor Without performing determination and counting, the character product group initialization operation main process is terminated, and the process returns to the calling process.

On the other hand, if there is no character product group currently being initialized, the process proceeds to step 1219 (FIG. 147B) to access the character product group initialization operation management data from the first line. The access index is set to 0 (S1219). Since the processing from step S1219 to step S1225 is the same as the processing at the time of the unit initialization operation (FIG. 143A) described above, description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing an example of the role product group simultaneous initialization action determination execution process (S1240).

First, it is determined whether or not the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is initialization start (S1241). If the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is not the start of initialization, it is not the timing to start the initialization operation of the accessory group of the photo number, so the simultaneous accessory group initialization operation determination execution processing is terminated. and return to the calling process.

On the other hand, if the accessory group initialization operation status of the photo number is the start of initialization, the accessory group initialization operation of the photo number should be performed, so all the accessory group initialization operation statuses are referred to, It is determined whether there is a group currently being initialized (S1242). As a result, if there is no group whose character object group initialization operation status is in initialization operation, the process proceeds to step S1246. On the other hand, if there is a group in which the character product group initialization operation status is in the process of initializing, the simultaneous operation possibility determination data by character product group (Fig. 149) is referred to, and the character product group currently being initialized and the corresponding photo It is determined whether or not the numbered role product group can be initialized at the same time (S1243).

As a result, if both character groups are not a combination that allows simultaneous initialization operations, the process returns to the calling source. On the other hand, if both role product groups are a combination that can be initialized at the same time, the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition flag of the role product group of the photo number is set to OFF (S1244).

Then, the execution time of the role product group initialization scheduler data set in the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer is the execution time of the role product group initialization scheduler data of the role product group initialization operation management data indicated by the index. It is determined whether it is shorter (S1245). As a result, the execution time of the role product group initialization scheduler data set in the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer is changed to the execution time of the role product group initialization scheduler data of the role product group initialization operation management data indicated by the index. If it is shorter than the time, the execution time of the role product group initialization operation scheduler data of the role product group initialization operation management data indicated by the index is set to all the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition timers (S1246). As a result, the execution time of the longest scheduler data is set in all the role object group scheduler overwrite prohibition timers, and until the initialization operation of the longest time is completed, the initialization operation and performance of the role objects of the other role object groups are performed. No action is performed.

On the other hand, the execution time of the accessory group initialization scheduler data set in the accessory group scheduler overwrite prohibition timer is the execution time of the accessory group initialization scheduler data of the accessory group initialization operation management data indicated by the index. If longer or equal, the character product group initialization operation scheduler data of the character product group initialization operation management data indicated by the index is activated using an unused motor system scheduler (S1247).

Then, the operation of the motor system scheduler that started the initialization operation and all the motor system schedulers other than those already being initialized are stopped (S1248), and the role product group scheduler overwrite prohibition flags of all the role product groups are set to ON. (S1249). After that, the initialization operation status of the photo number is set to "initializing operation in progress" (S1250), and the processing returns to the calling source.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of simultaneous operation possibility determination data for each character product group.

The simultaneous action determination data for each character object group defines a combination of character object groups that can be initialized at the same time. In this embodiment, the combination of the character object groups is defined so as not to exceed the upper limit of the current that can be used for the operation of the character. . For example, for the data in the first row, groups 01 and 05 can be initialized simultaneously, but none of groups 02, 03, and 04 can be initialized while group 01 is being initialized. indicates

The simultaneous action determination data for each character product group shown in FIG. 149 defines the combination of character product groups that can be initialized simultaneously, but the combination of character product groups that cannot be initialized at the same time. may be defined.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of motor pattern data update processing.

The motor pattern data update process is executed by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150, and called from the motor and solenoid driving process (S1104) of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process (FIG. 139).

First, a motor excitation step counter is set to 0 (S1401). The motor excitation step counter is provided in the motor control work area, is a number for managing the motor drive step, and is a counter that is counted up at the execution timing of the motor output data generation process (Fig. 151). .

Then, the new motor pattern number is set in the motor pattern number area of the motor control work area (S1402). A motor pattern number is a number for specifying one drive data stored in the motor drive data, and corresponds to a row of the motor drive data. Details of the motor drive data will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the motor control work area will be described. The work area for motor control is a storage area provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which is a volatile storage area of the peripheral control unit 4150, for the number of the motors for driving the character goods, and contains data for controlling the motors for driving the character goods. written. The motor control work area includes areas in which a motor excitation pattern monitoring timer, a motor excitation pattern number, a motor excitation step counter, a motor excitation output buffer, and a photo number are written. For example, by setting the motor excitation pattern number in the motor excitation pattern number area and setting the motor excitation pattern data in the motor excitation output buffer, the driver circuit drives the accessory driving motor.

After that, based on the motor number, the motor continuous excitation release timer time is acquired from the motor basic information data, and set to the motor excitation pattern monitoring timer (S1403). As described above, the motor excitation pattern monitoring timer is provided for each accessory driving motor in the motor control work area, and measures the driving time of the motor according to one motor excitation pattern.

Here, the motor basic information data will be described. The motor basic information data is data indicating the characteristics of the motor determined by the type of the motor for each accessory driving motor. It includes the photo number of the character object detection photosensor, the index of the buffer that temporarily stores the motor excitation pattern data, and information on the type of motor. The motor basic information data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, which is a non-volatile storage area of the peripheral control unit 4150. FIG. The motor stop excitation release timer time determines the upper limit of the duration of the stop operation of the accessory driving motor according to the motor stop excitation pattern, and when the stop excitation of the motor is not released for some reason, the timing to release the stop excitation of the motor determine. The motor continuous excitation release timer time determines the upper limit of the duration of the operation of the accessory driving motor with the same motor excitation pattern, and determines the timing to release the motor excitation if the motor excitation is not released for some reason. .

The motor continuous excitation release timer time and the motor excitation pattern monitoring timer are decremented by a predetermined number (for example, 1 every 1 ms) every predetermined time in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (FIG. 138).

FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating an example of motor output data generation processing.

The motor output data generation process is executed by calling the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 from the motor and solenoid driving process (S1104) of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process (FIG. 139).

First, the motor excitation step counter is incremented by 1 (S1411). Since the motor output data generation process is executed every 1 ms timer interrupt, the motor excitation step counter is counted up every 1 ms.

Then, using the motor pattern number set in the motor control work area, the motor excitation pattern number is obtained from the motor drive data (S1412).

Then, the obtained motor excitation pattern number is set in the motor control work area (S1413).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the motor excitation step counter value exceeds the number of motor operation steps of the motor drive data indicated by the motor pattern number set in the motor control work area (S1414). As a result, if the motor excitation step counter value is equal to or less than the number of motor operation steps, it is not time to switch the excitation pattern data of the motor excitation according to the motor excitation pattern number, so the process proceeds to step S1419. On the other hand, if the motor excitation step counter value is larger than the number of motor operation steps, it means that it is timing to switch the excitation pattern data of the motor excitation according to the motor excitation pattern number, so the output (photo information) of the accessory detection photosensor corresponding to the motor number and It is compared with the photo detection logical value of the role product group initialization operation management table, and it is determined whether the output of the role product detection photosensor indicates the initial position (S1415).

As a result, when the output of the role object detection photosensor does not indicate the initial position, the process proceeds to step S1419. On the other hand, if the photo information indicates the initial position, it is determined whether the motor step pattern of the motor pattern number set in the motor control work area is an operation pattern to the initial position (S1416). For example, in the motor drive data shown in FIG. 152, the data whose motor step pattern is "MOT_STEP_STTS_ORG" is an operation pattern for moving the accessory to the initial position.

As a result, if the motor step pattern of the motor driving data is not the movement pattern to the initial position, the process proceeds to step S1419. On the other hand, if the motor step pattern of the motor drive data is an operation pattern to the initial position, the motor stop excitation release timer time is obtained from the motor basic information data using the motor number, and set to the motor excitation pattern monitoring timer ( S1417).

For example, if the accessory is detected at the initial position (Yes at S1415) and the action pattern is for the initial position (Yes at S1416), the motor stop excitation release timer time is set to the motor excitation pattern monitoring timer (S1417 ). The motor excitation pattern monitoring timer is set with the motor continuous excitation release timer time. However, when the motor is detected at the initial position, the motor stop excitation release timer time takes precedence, so the two timer times are do not compete.

Then, the motor stop excitation pattern corresponding to the motor number is specified from the motor drive data, and the motor pattern number of the specified motor stop excitation pattern is set in the motor pattern number area of the motor control work area (S1418). For example, the motor stop excitation pattern is a pattern for stopping the energization of the accessory driving motor, and this pattern holds the accessory at the current position (for example, the initial position).

After that, it is determined whether or not the excitation pattern monitoring timer is 0 (S1419). As a result, if the excitation pattern monitoring timer is 0, it is not the motor stop excitation or motor continuous excitation monitoring period, so the motor output data generation process is terminated and the caller process is returned to. On the other hand, if the excitation pattern monitoring timer is not 0, 1 is subtracted from the excitation pattern monitoring timer to determine whether the excitation pattern monitoring timer is 0 (S1420).

As a result, if the excitation pattern monitoring timer after decrementing 1 is not 0, the motor output data generation process is terminated and the process returns to the calling process. On the other hand, if the excitation pattern monitoring timer after subtracting 1 is 0, the same motor excitation pattern continues to be executed, or the motor stop excitation pattern continues to be executed. In order to prevent damage to objects, the motor pattern number of the motor excitation release pattern corresponding to the motor number is set in the motor pattern number area of the motor control work area (S1421). The motor excitation release pattern is a pattern for stopping the energization of the accessory driving motor, and this pattern stops the operation of the motor for holding the accessory at the current position (for example, the initial position). The motor excitation release pattern is, for example, the data "//$no regeneration$" in the first line of the motor drive data shown in FIG. The excitation of the accessory driving motor is forcibly released at the timing when the excitation pattern monitoring timer times up.

In this manner, since the motor excitation release pattern is set in the event of an abnormality, even if the motor excitation is not released for some unintended reason, the motor excitation release pattern can reliably release the motor excitation.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of motor drive data.

The motor driving data defines the operation pattern of the accessory driving motor. Specifically, for each operation pattern, the motor step pattern, the number of motor operation steps, the rotation direction, the motor excitation pattern number, the motor number, etc. It is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, which is a non-volatile storage area of the peripheral control unit 4150. FIG.

The number of motor operation steps is the number of steps until the operation of the motor according to this operation pattern is completed, and is the maximum counter value managed by the motor excitation step counter. The motor excitation pattern number is information for reading the motor excitation pattern data. The motor number is the identifier of the motor driven by this operation pattern.

FIG. 153 is a timing chart at the time of the role product initialization operation by the single initialization operation process (FIGS. 143A and 143B). In FIG. 153, the case where abnormality is detected in the left united driving accessory of group 01, the left arm accessory of group 03, and the face accessory of group 04 will be described.

Referring to the character object group initialization operation management table (FIG. 141), the groups 01, 03, and 04 are defined in the order of higher order, and the priority of initialization is higher for the higher order. 04, the initialization operation is executed. The details of the character object initialization operation of group 01 will be described later with reference to FIG. 154 . Then, when it is determined that the initialization operation of the role object of group 01 has ended (S1290), in the role group initialization operation start determination process An initialization operation is started (t2). Specifically, since the left arm accessory of group 03 is abnormally stopped at a position other than the initial position, it is driven to the initial position and stopped at the origin (initial position). Then, when it is determined that the initialization operation of the character of group 03 has been completed (S1290), in the character group initialization operation start determination process (S1260), the initialization of the face character of group 04, which has the next highest priority, is performed. conversion operation is started (t3). Specifically, since the face accessory of group 04 is abnormally stopped at a position other than the initial position, it is driven to the initial position and stopped at the origin (initial position). Then, when the initialization operation of the character of the group 04 ends (t4), since there is no character whose abnormality is detected, the initialization of the character ends.

FIG. 154 is a timing chart at the time of the character object initialization operation of the group 01. FIG.

When an abnormality is detected in the left united driving accessory, the left united driving accessory belongs to group 01. Therefore, a sequence for returning the roles belonging to group 01 to the initial position is started, and the initialization operation is performed in the following procedure. I do.

First, when the position of the full-burst character is confirmed, the full-burst character is at the initial position, so the initialization operation is not performed. This is because if the full burst character is in the initial position, other characters in group 01 can be initialized to the initial position.

After that, the upper liquid crystal driving accessory 3410 and the lower liquid crystal driving accessory 3440 are operated (t11→t12), and are terminally stopped at the maximum movable position. As a result, a gap is formed between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 so that the character can move forward from the rear of the game board 5 .

After that, the left and right united storage-out objects 3740L, R are operated (t12→t13) and terminally stopped at the maximum movable position. As a result, the left united drive accessories 3710a, b and the right united drive accessories 3710c, d move from the rear to the front of the game board 5, and the left united drive accessories 3710a, b and the right united drive accessories 3710c, d move forward. becomes operational.

Then, when confirming the positions of the left united driving accessories 3710a, b and the right united driving accessories 3710c, d, the right united driving accessories 3710c, d are stopped at the initial positions, but the left united driving accessories 3710a, b is abnormally stopped at a position different from the initial position (t13). For this reason, first, the left united drive accessory 3710a, b is operated and stopped at the initial position (origin) (t13→t15). After that, the left united driving accessories 3710a, b and the right united driving accessories 3710c, d are operated and terminally stopped at the maximum movable position (t15→t17). After that, the left combination drive accessories 3710a, b and the right combination drive accessories 3710c, d are operated and stopped at the initial position (origin) (t17→t18). With this, it is possible to return the abnormally stopped left united drive accessories 3710a, b to their initial positions.

After that, the other accessories are returned to their initial positions. Specifically, the left and right united storage-exit objects 3740L and R are operated and returned to their initial positions (t18→t19). As a result, the left united driving accessories 3710 a, b and the right united driving accessories 3710 c, d are stored behind the game board 5 . Then, the upper liquid crystal driving accessory 3410 and the lower liquid crystal driving accessory 3440 are operated and returned to the initial position (t19→t2). Thereby, the gap between the upper liquid crystal display device 3610 and the lower liquid crystal display device 3620 is closed.

In this embodiment, due to the mechanism of the accessory, the accessory that is abnormally stopped is once returned to the initial position (t13→t15), and after stopping at the maximum movable position (t15→t17), the initial position (t17→t18). However, the terminal stop to the maximum movable position (t15→t17) and the return operation to the initial position (t17→t18) are not performed, and the abnormally stopped accessory is returned to the initial position (t13→t15). It's okay.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one group is defined by the role objects whose movement ranges interfere with each other, and the initialization operation of returning the role objects to their initial positions is performed for each group. The accessory can be smoothly returned to the initial position regardless of the state. In addition, groups are defined so that the current during operation of the role does not exceed the upper limit, and the order of operation of the objects within the group is defined. It is possible to prevent excess current that can be supplied by the power supply board when returning to the initial position.

FIG. 155 is a timing chart at the time of character product initialization operation by the simultaneous initialization operation process (FIGS. 147A and 147B). In FIG. 155, similar to FIG. 153, the case where an abnormality is detected in the left union driving accessory of group 01, the left arm accessory of group 03, and the face accessory of group 04 will be described.

Referring to the character object group initialization operation management table (FIG. 141), groups 01, 03, and 04 are defined in the order of higher order, and the initialization operation is executed in the order of priority groups 01, 03, and 04. . The details of the character object initialization operation of group 01 will be described later with reference to FIG. 154 . Then, when it is determined that the initialization operation of the role object of group 01 has ended (S1290), in the role group initialization operation start determination process An initialization operation is started (t2). At this time, referring to the simultaneous operation possibility determination data for each accessory group (FIG. 149), it is determined in the second and fifth lines that the initialization operation can be performed simultaneously for the groups 03 and 04. , the group 03 and the group 04 are initialized at the same time. Specifically, since the left arm accessory of group 03 is abnormally stopped at a position other than the initial position, it is driven to the initial position, and the face accessory of group 04 is abnormally stopped at a position other than the initial position. Drive to the initial position. Then, when the initialization operation of the characters of the groups 03 and 04 is completed (t3), since there is no character whose abnormality is detected, the initialization of the characters ends.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a combination of character object groups is defined such that the current during operation of the character object does not exceed the upper limit value, and at the same time, an initialization operation is performed to return the character object to the initial position for each operable group. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the total current during operation of the character and prevent an excess of the current that can be supplied by the power supply board when the character is returned to the initial position. In addition, it is possible to shorten the return time to the initial position of the character while suppressing the electric current during operation of the character. Furthermore, the role object can be smoothly returned to the initial position while suppressing the electric current during operation of the role object.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, but various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims. including configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, representative aspects of the invention other than those described in the scope of claims are as follows.

[1A] A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and provides a player with an advantageous gaming state when winning the lottery,
a plurality of accessories that operate when energized to perform effects related to the result of the lottery;
a peripheral control device for controlling the operation of the role object;
a power supply device that supplies power to the accessory,
The plurality of role objects constitutes a role object group such that the role objects whose movement ranges interfere with each other belong to the same group,
The peripheral control device initializes the role product by operating the role product of one or a plurality of role product groups at a timing such that current consumption during operation of the plurality of role objects does not exceed a predetermined value. A game machine characterized by returning to a position.

[1B] The peripheral control device
instructing an initialization operation to move the character object to an initial position for each of one or a plurality of character object groups when the gaming machine is powered on;
The gaming machine according to 1A, wherein the accessory is operated for the effect after the initialization operation is completed.

[1C] The plurality of character objects form a character object group such that character objects that cannot operate simultaneously due to interference in their movement ranges belong to the same group,
The peripheral control device
instructing an initialization operation to move the accessory to an initial position when the gaming machine is powered on;
The gaming machine according to 1A or 1B, wherein after the initialization operation is finished, the role product of the role product group to which the accessory belongs is operated for the effect.

[1D] The gaming machine according to any one of 1A to 1C, wherein the peripheral control device transmits an instruction to operate the accessory for the effect after the completion of the initialization operation.

[1E] The peripheral control device issues an operation instruction including a time until the completion of the initialization operation so that the operation of the performance object starts after the completion of the initialization operation. , and the game machine according to any one of 1A to 1D is characterized in that it delays by the relevant time and operates the accessory.

[1F] The gaming machine according to any one of 1A to 1E, wherein the peripheral control device operates a role object for the effect in the effect that starts after the completion of the initialization operation. .

[1G] The gaming machine comprises a sensor that detects that the accessory is present at an initial position,
The peripheral control device moves the role object by a predetermined amount from the initial position, and after the sensor detects that the role object is not in the initial position, moves the role object to the initial position, and the sensor moves the role object to the initial position. The gaming machine according to any one of 1A to 1F, characterized by confirming that it is in the initial position.

[2A] A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and provides a player with an advantageous gaming state when the lottery is won,
a plurality of accessories that operate when energized to perform effects related to the result of the lottery;
a peripheral control device for controlling the operation of the role object;
a power supply device that supplies power to the accessory;
a sensor that detects the state of the accessory,
The peripheral control device
When the state of the gaming machine changes (for example, when the power is turned on, the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation ends, the big win effect starts, the big win effect ends, the demonstration starts, the demonstration ends, the door is opened, and the door is closed), the output of the sensor. Detect the state of the role object by
By instructing an initialization operation to move the accessory detected to be abnormal and the accessory whose movement range interferes with the initial position, the accessory is returned to the initial position. game machine.

[2B] The peripheral control device activates a scheduler in which an operation pattern is set for moving all the character objects in the character object group to which the character object detected as being abnormal belongs to the initial position in a predetermined order. The game machine according to 2A is characterized in that, by doing so, the accessories included in the group of accessories are returned to their initial positions in a predetermined order.

[2C] The peripheral control device
when a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected, detecting the position of the accessory by the output of the sensor;
When the position of the character is not normal in the current game state, the character is returned to the initial position by instructing an initialization operation to move all the characters of the character to which the character belongs to the initial position. The gaming machine according to 2A or 2B, characterized in that

[6A] A display device that displays an effect screen related to the result of the lottery according to a display control command from the peripheral control device,
The peripheral control device according to any one of 2A to 2C, characterized in that, from an effect that starts after the initialization operation is completed, a character related to the initialization operation is operated for the effect. game machine.

[9A] Each of the accessories has one or more drive units (motors, solenoids) that generate power when energized,
The peripheral control device moves in the predetermined direction after moving in a direction opposite to a predetermined direction for returning to the initial position all of the character objects in the character object group to which the character object detected to be abnormal belongs. The game machine according to any one of 2A to 2C, characterized in that the accessory is returned to the initial position by pressing.

[9B] Each of the accessories has one or more drive units (motors, solenoids) that generate power when energized,
The peripheral control device
moving in a first direction all the characters in the character object group to which the character detected as being abnormal belongs, and determining whether or not the action moves the character,
When it is determined that the role does not move, the role is returned to the initial position by moving the role in the first direction after moving the role in the second direction opposite to the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of 2A to 2C, characterized in that

[9C] The game according to 9B, wherein the peripheral control device determines whether the character moves in the first direction based on at least one of the output of the sensor and the current flowing through the drive unit. machine.

[10A] The gaming machine according to any one of 2A to 9C, wherein the peripheral control device does not determine whether the state of the accessory is normal until the initialization operation is completed.

[3A] A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and provides a player with an advantageous gaming state when winning the lottery,
a plurality of accessories that operate when energized to perform an effect related to the result of the lottery;
a peripheral control device for controlling the operation of the role object;
a power supply device that supplies power to the accessory;
a sensor that detects the state of the accessory,
The peripheral control device
instructing the character to return to its initial position when the character performs a performance action related to the result of the lottery;
Detecting the state of the character by the output of the sensor,
when the output of the sensor indicates that the accessory is not in the initial position, adding a predetermined counter;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the value of the predetermined counter is greater than a predetermined threshold value, it is determined that the accessory is not normal, and the accessory is not operated.

[3B] The plurality of character objects form a character object group such that character objects that cannot operate simultaneously due to interference of their movement ranges belong to the same group;
The gaming machine according to 3A, wherein the peripheral control device does not cause all the accessories in the accessory group to which the accessory judged to be abnormal belongs to perform an effect operation related to the result of the lottery.

[3C] The peripheral control device
instructing the action to the initial position of the character object at the time of the initial operation when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or at the time of the initialization operation of the character object,
The game machine according to 3A or 3B, wherein the state of the accessory is detected by the output of the sensor after the instruction of the action.

[4A] A display device that displays an effect screen related to the result of the lottery according to a display control command from the peripheral control device,
The gaming machine according to any one of 3A to 3C, wherein when the peripheral control device determines that the accessory is not normal, it displays on the display device that the accessory is not normal.

[4B] The peripheral control device displays on the display device that the accessory is not normal when the accessory that is determined to be abnormal performs an effect operation related to the result of the lottery. The gaming machine described in 4A.

[5A] Each of the accessories has one or more drive units (motors, solenoids) that generate power when energized,
The gaming machine according to any one of 3A to 4B, wherein the predetermined counter is provided for each driving unit.

[7A] A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and provides a player with an advantageous gaming state when winning the lottery,
a plurality of accessories that operate when energized to perform effects related to the result of the lottery;
a peripheral control device for controlling the operation of the role object;
a power supply device that supplies power to the accessory,
Each of the said characters is
Each of the accessories has one or more drive units (motors, solenoids) that generate power by energization,
The peripheral control device
When the accessory reaches the starting point or end point of its range of motion, the driving unit instructs an operation to maintain the accessory at the reaching point,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the operation of the driving unit to maintain the accessory at the reaching point exceeds a predetermined time, an instruction to stop the operation of the driving unit is issued.

[7B] The peripheral control device
A timer monitors the operation time of the drive unit,
The game machine according to 7A, wherein when it is determined that the operating time of the driving unit has exceeded a predetermined time as a result of the monitoring, an instruction to stop the operation of the driving unit is given.

[8A] A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and provides a player with an advantageous gaming state when winning the lottery,
a plurality of accessories that operate when energized to perform effects related to the result of the lottery;
a peripheral control device for controlling the operation of the role object;
a power supply device that supplies power to the accessory,
Each of the accessories has one or more drive units (motors, solenoids) that generate power by energization,
The peripheral control device
Instructing the operation of the activation unit so that the role object operates,
A gaming machine, wherein an instruction to stop the operation of the driving unit is given when the operation of the driving unit exceeds a predetermined time.

[8B] The peripheral control device
A timer monitors the operation time of the drive unit,
The game machine according to 8A, wherein when it is determined that the operating time of the driving unit has exceeded a predetermined time as a result of the monitoring, an instruction to stop the operation of the driving unit is given.

[8C] The peripheral control device
transmitting an action instruction including an action pattern of the character,
The game machine according to 8B, wherein when it is determined that the operation time of the drive unit in the operation pattern has exceeded a predetermined time as a result of the monitoring, an instruction to stop the operation of the drive unit is issued.

[10A] A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and provides a player with an advantageous gaming state when winning the lottery,
a plurality of accessories that operate when energized to perform effects related to the result of the lottery;
a peripheral control device for controlling the operation of the role object;
a power supply device that supplies power to the accessory;
a sensor that detects the state of the accessory,
Each of the accessories has one or more drive units (motors, solenoids) that generate power by energization,
The peripheral control device
Instruct the initialization operation to move the character to the initial position,
The gaming machine according to any one of 3A to 8C, wherein the state of the accessory is not detected by the output of the sensor during the initialization operation.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 930 power supply board box 940 interface control board box 950 payout control board box 951 payout control board 980 back cover 1000 panel decoration 1001 outer rail 1002 inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1005 Right rail 1006 Blocking part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1111 Out port 1183 Gaming state indicator 1184 First special symbol memory display 1185 First special symbol display 1186 Second special symbol display 1187 Second special symbol memory Display device 1188 Normal pattern memory display device 1189 Normal pattern display device 1190 Round display device 1191 Function display board 1200 Board holder 1300 Main control unit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1500 Peripheral control unit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1610 Lower display liquid crystal Device 2000 Game panel 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting opening 2005 First big winning opening 2006 Second big winning opening 2006a Receiving part 2006b Shelf part 2021 V winning opening 2100 Panel board 2101 Starting opening 2102 Lower starting port 2103 Grand winning port 2104 General winning port 2105 Starting port solenoid 2106 Movable piece 2107 Opening/closing member 2108 Attacker solenoid 2110 Count switch 2112 Opening 2113 Overlap portion 2122 Starting port passage hole 2123 Warp hole 2200 Starting port unit 2203 Shelf 2205 Decoration Plate 2220 Warp Entrance 2500 Center Accessory 2510 Center Base 2511 Flange 2522 Warp Exit 2523 Guidance Path 2530 Stage 2540 Right-handed Play Area 2541 Upper Right Distribution Space 2542 Route Change Member 2545 Decorative Member 2547 Gate Sensor 2551 Second Starter Sensor 3000 Back Unit 3010 back box 3050 warp passage 3100 back decoration unit 3110 back decoration upper unit 3120 back decoration left unit 3130 back decoration lower unit 3200 front accessory unit 3210 face driving part 3210a left face part 3210b right face part 3220 shoulder driving part 32 20a left arm part 3220b right arm part 3230 full burst driving part (lower accessory)
3250 right guiding path 3251 rib portion 3300 rear accessory unit 3310 back box 3315 stepped portion 3316 lower right ball passage unit 3320 liquid crystal drive unit 3400 liquid crystal drive unit 3410 upper liquid crystal drive unit 3411 upper liquid crystal holding member 3412 biasing member 3413 guide rod 3414 Bearing portion 3415 Upper liquid crystal drive motor 3416 Rack gear 3418 Pressing portion 3420 Upper liquid crystal drive gear 3421 Upper liquid crystal transmission gear 3421a Large diameter transmission gear 3421b Small diameter transmission gear 3422 Transmission gear 3423 Elevation drive gear 3440 Lower liquid crystal drive unit 3441 Lower liquid crystal holding member 3442 Biasing member 3443 Guide shaft 3444 Bearing 3445 Lower liquid crystal drive motor 3445a Large diameter transmission gear 3446 Rack gear 3450 Plate member 3450a Guide slit 3450b Rack gear 3451 Transmission gear 3480 Liquid crystal housing 3480a Upper liquid crystal housing 3480b Lower liquid crystal housing 3480c Opening 3485 Motor housing portion 3486 Motor housing portion 3600 Liquid crystal display device 3610 Upper liquid crystal display device 3620 Lower liquid crystal display device 3630 Liquid crystal decoration member 3630a Guide portion 3630b Rack gear 3631 Rotating member 3700 Body driving portion 3700a Front decoration portion 3701 Base portion 3710 Movable decoration portion 3710a Upper left movable decorative portion 3710b Lower left movable decorative portion 3710c Upper right movable decorative portion 3710d Lower right movable decorative portion 3715 Guide rod 3720 Forward drive motor 3721 First rack gear 3722 Second rack gear 3725 Drive gear 3730 Combined drive motor 3734 Drive shaft 3735 Screw gear (worm )
3736 gear (worm wheel)
3738 rotation gear 4100 main control board 4110 payout control board 4140 peripheral control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a game progresses based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition,
a production moving body;
a moving body supporting portion that supports the effect moving body so as to be movable between a first position and a second position;
a biasing member that biases the effect moving body toward the first position,
A force that causes the effect moving body to stay in place when the effect moving object is in a stationary state, and a force that causes the effect moving object to start moving when a force exceeding this force is applied to the effect moving object. is "A", the force exerted by the biasing member toward the first position is "B", and the direction component of the force due to the weight of the effect moving body that opposes "B" is "C", while the "B" tends to increase as the effect moving body moves away from the first position and approaches the second position,
The production moving body is
When the gaming machine is placed in the hall, "A>|B−C|" regardless of the movable range between the first position and the second position. A relationship is established and it is possible to stay on the spot,
The effect moving body is movable by the driving force of a motor, and the driving force of the motor is transmitted to the effect moving body through a gear so that the driving force is increased and transmitted to the effect moving body. is,
The gear ratio is set so that the driving force 'D' generated by the motor is equal to or greater than the force 'A' at which the effect moving body starts to move, and is transmitted to the effect moving body. has been
The urging member is made invisible to the player when the effect moving body is positioned at the first position where a force exceeding "A" is not applied to the effect moving body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images